Contents

BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 303
1 of 303

Summary of Content for BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

THE BMW 6 SERIES COUPE. OWNER'S MANUAL.

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

640i 650i

650i xDrive

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VIII/11, 09 11 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 292.

6 Notes

At a glance 12 Cockpit 16 iDrive 22 Voice activation system 25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls 30 Opening and closing 45 Adjusting 54 Transporting children safely 57 Driving 69 Displays 81 Lamps 86 Safety 98 Driving stability control systems 106 Driving comfort 131 Climate control 136 Interior equipment 141 Storage compartments

Driving tips 146 Things to remember when driving 149 Loading 151 Saving fuel

Navigation 158 Navigation

Entertainment 176 Tone 179 Radio 187 CD/multimedia

Communication 210 Telephone 222 Office 231 Contacts 233 ConnectedDrive

Mobility 242 Refueling 244 Fuel 245 Wheels and tires 255 Engine compartment 257 Engine oil 260 Maintenance 262 Replacing components 267 Breakdown assistance 273 Care

Reference 280 Technical data 283 Short commands of the voice activation

system 292 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not availa ble in your vehicle, e.g. because of the selected optional equipment or the country-specific var iants. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple mentary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra tions.

Status of the Owner's Manual The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, re

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

quires suitable maintenance and repair meth ods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and Accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by BMW. When you pur chase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane ously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from de fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from in stallation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod ucts approved by BMW, together with profes sional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or trans ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie- talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, re placement, or repair of the emission control de vices and systems may be performed by any au

tomotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re productive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op erated under those conditions. If you wish to op erate your vehicle in another country or region,

Seite 7

Notes

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi cle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: BMW Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War ranty.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 9

Notes

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Cockpit Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Roller sunblind42 2 Power windows41 3 Exterior mirror operation51 4 Driver assistance systems

Active Blind Spot Detec tion96

Collision warning112

Lane departure warning94

Night Vision with pedestrian de tection126

Head-up Display129

5 Lamps Front fog lamps84

Parking lamps81

Low beams81

Seite 12

At a glance Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Automatic headlamp con trol82 Daytime running lights82 Adaptive light control83 High-beam Assistant83 Instrument lighting84

6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal63

High beams, head lamp flasher63

High-beam Assistant83

Roadside parking lamps82

Computer76

7 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed113,106

Resume speed115,108

Cruise control on/off, interrupt ing106

Increase distance108

Reduce distance108

8 Instrument cluster69

9 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation22

Telephone210

10 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers64

Rain sensor65

Clean the windshields and head lamps65

11 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off58

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function59

12 Horn 13 Steering wheel heating53

14 Adjust the steering wheel53

15 Unlocking the hood 16 Open the trunk lid38

Seite 13

Cockpit At a glance

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

All around the center console

1 Headliner15 2 Control Display16 3 Glove compartment141 4 Air vent134 5 Hazard warning system267

Central locking system37

6 Radio179 CD/multimedia187

7 Automatic climate control131 8 Controller with buttons16 9 Parking brake61

Automatic Hold62

10 PDC Park Distance Control115 Top View120 Backup camera118 Parking assistant123 Side View122

HDC Hill Descent Control100

11 Driving Experience Switch102

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol98

12 Transmission selector lever

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request267

2 Glass sunroof, powered43

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag88

4 Reading lamps85

5 Interior lamps85

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

iDrive Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper ated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Control Display

Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Controller Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn.

Seite 16

At a glance iDrive

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

CD Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

Seite 17

iDrive At a glance

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previous display.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis played.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".

This area remains unchanged. Control options for the selected main menu,

e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the sta tus field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins are switched on.

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Symbol Meaning

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi tion.

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the but ton.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. five seconds. 2. "OK"

Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the letter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters:

Symbol Function

Move the controller up: switch from upper to lower case letters.

Move the controller up: switch from lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the en

try for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can be

entered using the spelling of language avail able on the Control Display.

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your en tries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us ing the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation sys tem.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identified. Set the language, refer to page 79.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis play. There are short commands for functions of the main menu. Some list entries, e.g. Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation system. Speak these list entries exactly as they are dis played in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: Voice commands For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly ir

Seite 22

At a glance Voice activation system

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

respective of which menu item is currently se lected, e.g., Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 283.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are announced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. Press the button on the steering wheel.

5. C D track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an nouncements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel ephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 267, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

When selecting a radio station, use the com mon pronunciation of the station name:

Seite 23

Voice activation system At a glance

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Station ... e. g. Classic Radio station Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun

roof closed to prevent noise interference. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

Seite 24

At a glance Voice activation system

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri bed therein.

Components of the integrated Owner's Manual The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor mation or access possibilities.

Quick Reference Guide Located in the Quick Reference is important in formation for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.

Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.

Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

1. Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range:

"Quick reference" "Search by pictures" "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.

Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened directly.

Seite 25

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Opening during operation via iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.

Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im

mediately.

Seite 26

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 27

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are

useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Trunk lid 4 Panic mode, headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture

General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal Profile, refer to page 31.

In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 260.

Integrated key

Press the button on the back of the remote con trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door. Storage compartment in the center armrest.

The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the tailgate, refer to page 38.

Replacing the battery

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.

2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart

ment; see arrow 2.

Seite 30

Controls Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.

5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling cen ter or to your service center.

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: Interference of radio transmission to remote

control by external sources. Discharged battery in the remote control. A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine in case of emergency detection of remote control

Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the re mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote con

trol, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.

Personal Profile The concept

Personal Profile concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated. When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that

was last detected and called up with the re mote control is used.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for three Per sonal Profiles and one guest profile.

Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro file function. For more information, contact your service center. Transmission takes place via: The USB interface, refer to page 141, in the

glove compartment onto a USB device.

Profile management

Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings"

Seite 31

Opening and closing Controls

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. "Profiles"

3. Select a profile. The profile that is opened is assigned to the re mote control currently in use.

Renaming profiles 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "Settings" 3. "Profiles"

The current profile is selected. 4. "Options" Open. 5. "Reset current profile"

Importing profiles Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile"

4. USB interface, refer to page 141: "USB device"

Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. This can be useful for storing and opening per sonal settings, e.g. if settings are accidentally changed or deleted.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. USB interface, refer to page 141: "USB

device"

Using the guest profile The guest profile can be used to make individual settings without affecting the three Personal Profiles. This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. The current profile is selected.

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. Open "Guest". 5. Create the settings. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.

Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.

1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Display user list at startup"

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re

fer to page 112. Exterior mirror position, refer to page 51. CD/Multimedia, refer to page 187: audio

source listened to last. Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re

fer to page 103. Driver's seat position, refer to page 35: au

tomatic retrieval after unlocking. Programmable memory buttons, refer to

page 20: assignment. Head-up Display, refer to page 129: selec

tion, brightness and position of the display. Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to

page 82: time setting. Tone, refer to page 176: tone settings. Automatic climate control, refer to

page 131: settings. Steering wheel position, refer to page 53. Navigation, refer to page 158: map views,

route criteria, voice output on/off.

Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer to page 126: selection of functions and type of display.

Daytime running lights, refer to page 82: current setting.

Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 177: adjusting the signal tone volume.

Radio, refer to page 179: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings.

Backup camera, refer to page 118: selec tion of functions and type of display.

Side View, refer to page 122: selection of the display type.

Language on the Control Display, refer to page 79.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 94: last setting, on/off.

Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 96: last setting, on/off.

Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 63.

Locking the vehicle, refer to page 37: after a brief period or after starting to drive.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Trunk lid. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the driver's door lock. Via the door handles. Via the button in the trunk lid.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control: Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,

the theft protection is activated/deactivated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off.

The alarm system, refer to page 40, is armed or disarmed.

Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system.

If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you

when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.

Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button:"

4. Select the desired function: "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle.

"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.

Press and hold the button on the re mote control.

The windows are opened, the glass sunroof is raised and the sliding visor moves back. Releasing the button stops the motion.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Locking Press the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature

Briefly press the button on the remote control.

The duration can be set in the Control Display.

Opening the trunk lid Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the cargo area. The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma

tion signals. "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" "Flash when lock/unlock"

Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that

the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer

ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.

Activating the setting 1. "Settings"

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."

Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the door lock using the integrated key.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S. LX8766E. LX8CAS. LX8CAS2. MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Remove the key before pulling the door handle

Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.

In some country-specific versions, the alarm system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control, or switch on the igni tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.

In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the door lock.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Locking the doors and trunk lid at once To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door.

3. Lock the vehicle. Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door from the outside.

The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from the inside Locking and unlocking

Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk lid when the doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Doors Automatic Soft Closing To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Trunk lid Opening During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.

Opening from the outside

Press on the top half of the BMW emblem. If the backup camera is activated, push the swiveled out BMW emblem further up to open the trunk lid.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Opening from the inside Push the button in the driver's footwell.

If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked.

Closing

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. The vehicle is locked completely.

Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately using the switch in the front center armrest.

Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. Trunk lid not secured, ar

row 2.

Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system. When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate cannot be accessed. This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra red remote control can be handed out without the key.

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Convenient closing. Unlocking of the trunk lid separately. Starting the engine.

Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer

ence nearby. To lock the vehicle, the remote control must

be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the remote

control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Ac cess.

Unlocking

Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre sponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle.

Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that

no one becomes trapped.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.

Malfunction Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. To subsequently start the engine, hold the re mote control against the marked area on the steering column, refer to page 31.

Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid. Movements in the vehicle. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.

Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning system.

By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control, Comfort Access or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if necessary, by emergency detection of the re mote control.

Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again by the alarm system. The haz ard warning system flashes once. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Panic mode Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the

remote control with you, pull on the door handle.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine is started, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol lowing situations:

In automatic car washes. In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 34, via the remote control.

Closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 39, with Com fort Access.

Pinch protection If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted. The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Roller sun blind General information If you are no longer able to move the roller sun blind for the rear window after having activated it a number of times in a row, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat ing. Let the system cool. The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot be moved at low interior temperatures.

Driver's door controls

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Roller blind for rear window Press the button.

Glass sunroof, powered with tilt function General information The glass sunroof is operational when the igni tion is switched on.

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.

Tilting up and closing glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly.

The closed roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point. Closed roof is raised and the sliding visor moves all the way back.

To close the switch, press upward briefly or twice forward past the resistance point.

Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 39, with Com fort Access.

Opening/closing the sliding visor Press the switch in the de

sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.

Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter rupted. The sunroof is raised again.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing without the pinch protection system If there is an external danger or if, e. g., icing of the glass sunroof prevents automatic closing, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or clos ing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection.

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is complete: Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is completed when the sunroof and sliding visor are completely closed.

The roof closes without pinch protection.

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Adjusting Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 48. Head restraints, refer to page 49. Airbags, refer to page 86.

Seats Adjusting

General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle con trol could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

At a glance

1 Active seat 2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 3 Backrest width 4 Lumbar support 5 Backrest, head restraint 6 Shoulder support 7 Forward/back, height, tilt 8 Thigh support

Note The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the Func tion, refer to page 35, for this is activated.

Adjustments in detail 1. Forward/back.

Seite 45

Adjusting Controls

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

Thigh support

Multifunctional seat

Adjust the position using the lever.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/ decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Backrest width Change the width of the backrest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Seite 46

Controls Adjusting

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Shoulder support

Also supports the back in the shoulder area: Results in a relaxed seating position. Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Active seat Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.

Press the button. The LED lights up.

Front seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each temper ature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature selected last.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. The temperature may be reduced or seat heat ing may be switched off entirely to save battery power.

Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and back rest can be distributed in different ways.

1. "Climate" 2. "Seat heating distribution" 3. Select the required seat.

4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.

Active seat ventilation, front The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e. g., if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.

Seite 47

Adjusting Controls

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Switching on Press the button once for each ventila tion level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit. If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Max imum Cooling function is activated, the seat ventilation automatically switches to the highest level. When the Maximum Cooling function is switched off, the unit switches to the previously set level.

After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling.

Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out.

Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Notes Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear

a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im pact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka ble objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Seite 48

Controls Adjusting

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Safety belt reminder for the driver's and front passenger seat

The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap proximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function Do not use seat or head restraint cov

ers. Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

on the head restraints. Only attach accessories approved by BMW

to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered.

Adjusting the height

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head

Forward: pull. Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

Entering the rear Note

Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving away, fold back and lock the

backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.

Unlocking the backrest

1. Pull lever up to the stop. 2. Fold backrest forward.

Changing the seat position

To change the entry area: Press and hold the button until the seat has

moved to the desired position. Releasing the button stops the motion.

Press the button briefly. The seat automat ically moves to the respective end position. Pressing again stops the motion.

Folding back and locking the backrest After entering the rear, fold the backrest back and lock it.

Press the button. The seat moves to its original position. Pressing again stops the

motion.

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory General information

Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re trieved for each remote control. The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally: Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident.

Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig

nition. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until

the adjustment procedure is completed.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open or close the door or trunk lid. Press a button on the remote control.

Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Storing positions Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 50.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear view mirror, refer to page 52.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

From behind when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections.

Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 50.

Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in jury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au

tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 88.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes

Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto matically, refer to page 88.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.

Seite 54

Controls Transporting children safely

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest po sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height after this.

Backrest width Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory posi tion.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren.

Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; oth erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fix ing system is resting snugly against the back rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child re straint fixing system.

Seite 55

Transporting children safely Controls

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer

to the operating instructions of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the upper

LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

Mounting points

There are two mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with a tether strap.

Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.

1 Direction of travel 2 Upper retaining strap 3 Head restraint. 4 Rear window shelf 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Hook for upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Fold the attachment point up. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the

head restraint. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the

mounting eye. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.

Seite 56

Controls Transporting children safely

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Start/Stop button The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Automatic transmission: the en gine starts if the brake is de

pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed. Manual transmission: the engine starts if the clutch is depressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. The ignition switches off automatically:

When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams are switched on.

Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition off Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignition off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: During locking, also with the low beams ac

tivated. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.

Seite 57

Driving Controls

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

When opening and closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off.

When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driv er's seat belt, the radio ready state remains ac tive.

Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: When the ignition is switched off: press ON/

OFF button on the radio. When the engine is running: press START/

STOP button. Some electronic systems/power consumers re main ready for operation. Radio ready state switches off automatically: After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central

locking system. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine General information

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger.

Before leaving the car with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the car from moving.

Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod erate engine speeds.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press on the clutch and shift to neutral. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Automatic-Transmission

Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.

Seite 58

Controls Driving

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 273.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake.

Automatic-Transmission

Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve

hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The concept The automatic engine start-stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e. g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.

Automatic mode The automatic engine start/stop function is op erational after each engine start. The function is activated above a certain speed. Automatic transmission: from 5 mph, ap

prox. 9 km/h.

Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions: Automatic transmission: The selector lever is in transmission position

D. The brake pedal remains pressed while the

vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster The display indicates that the Au tomatic Engine Start/Stop Func tion is ready for an automatic en gine start.

Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature below approx. +37 /

+3 . External temperature above approx. +95 /

+35 and the automatic climate control is operating.

The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.

The engine is not yet at operating tempera ture.

The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer ing wheel is being turned.

Seite 59

Driving Controls

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

After driving in reverse. Fogging of the windows when the automatic

climate control is switched on. The vehicle battery charge is very low. The engine compartment lid is unlocked. HDC is activated. The parking assistant is activated. Stop-and-go traffic.

Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions: Automatic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal. When Automatic Hold is activated: press the accelerator.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the

driver's door is open. The hood was unlocked. The indicator lamps come on. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button.

Note Even if driving away was not intended, the de activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: Excessive warming of the passenger com

partment when the cooling function is switched on.

The steering wheel is turned. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.

Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from P to N, D, R, or M/ S.

Automatic transmission: the accelerator and the brake are pressed at the same time.

Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low. Excessive cooling of the passenger com

partment when the heating is switched on.

Preventing an automatic engine stop with automatic transmission

The concept To make it possible to drive away very quickly, such as at an intersection, the automatic engine stop can be actively prevented.

Preventing an engine stop using the brake pedal The engine stop can be actively prevented within one second after the vehicle comes to a standstill. Immediately after the vehicle comes to a

standstill, briefly press the brake pedal forcefully.

Then press the brake pedal with normal braking force.

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Using the button

Seite 60

Controls Driving

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Press the button.

LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Automatic Engine Start/ Stop Function is deactivated. Automatic transmission: the transmission position P is engaged automatically.

2. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start-/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Automatic Engine Start/ Stop Function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, such as when the driver is de tected to be absent.

Malfunction The automatic engine start/stop function no lon ger switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is pos sible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake The concept The parking brake is primarily intended to pre vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Setting Pull the switch. The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up in red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehi cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

While driving Use while driving serves as an emergency brak ing function: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the button is being pulled.

Seite 61

Driving Controls

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian

models

If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.

Releasing With the ignition switched on:

Manual transmission: Press the switch while the brake or clutch is pressed.

Automatic transmission: Press the switch while the brake is pressed or transmission position P is engaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic Release in cars with automatic transmission For automatic release, operate the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator lamp go out. Subject to the following requirements, the park ing brake is automatically released by operation of the accelerator pedal: Engine on. Drive position engaged. Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal

Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.

Automatic Hold

The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.

For your safety Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the parking brake is set: The engine is switched off. A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary. The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill

using the parking brake. The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Activating This function can be activated when the driver's door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or while driving.

Press the button.

Seite 62

Controls Driving

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The LED and the letters AUTO H light up.

The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated.

Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake, refer to page 61, is set manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto matically.

Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto matically secured against rolling when it stops.

The indicator lamp lights up in green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Before driving into a car wash Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the

parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.

Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coast

ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Automatic Hold remains activated during an en gine stop brought about by the Automatic En gine Start/Stop Function.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the re sistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times.

Seite 63

Driving Controls

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

High beams, arrow 1. Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are fro

zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

Switching on

Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Seite 64

Controls Driving

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Rain sensor

The concept The time between wipes is controlled automat ically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating the rain sensor

Press the button on the wiper lever. When activated, the wipers move over the wind shield once. The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam age could be caused by undesired wiper activa tion.

Rain sensor sensitivity

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlamps

Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated when ever the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

Seite 65

Driving Controls

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep

it away from sources of ignition. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the instructions on the container.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir. Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's rec ommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio.

Manual transmission Shifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gear When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance needs to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 57, position P is engaged automatically.

Seite 66

Controls Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: After the engine is switched off, if the car is

in radio ready state, refer to page 58, or if the ignition is switched off, refer to page 57, and if position R or D is engaged.

With the ignition is off, if position N is en gaged.

If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi tion P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging the transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driv ing

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Press unlock button, in order to: Engage R. Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Sport program DS and manual mode M/ S

Activating sport program DS

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. The sport program of the transmission is acti vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Sport automatic transmission

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the trans mission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the system switches back into automatic mode if the selec tor lever is in transmission position D. Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis played, e.g.: P.

Seite 68

Controls Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Displays Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge72 2 Speedometer 3 Indicator/warning lamps70 4 Tachometer72

5 Oil temperature72 6 Electronic displays70 7 Reset miles73

Seite 69

Displays Controls

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Electronic displays

1 Messages, e.g. Check Control70 Time73 Date73

2 Range73 3 Computer76 4 Navigation display158

Service requirements74

Miles/trip miles73 5 Selection list, forinstance radio75

Current fuel consumption74 Energy recovery74 External temperature73

6 Transmission display68

Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Dis play.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Seite 70

Controls Displays

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

Turn signal

Parking brake

Parking brake in Canadian models

Automatic Hold

Front fog lamps

High beams

High-beam Assistant

Parking lamps, headlamp control

Active Cruise Control

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Cruise control

Lane departure warning

Symbol Function or system

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Tire Pressure Monitor Flat Tire Monitor

Safety belts

Airbag system

Steering system

Emissions

Emissions in Canadian models

Brake system

Brake system in Canadian models

Antilock Brake System ABS

Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana dian models

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored

Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control

Seite 71

Displays Controls

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Addition information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of urgent messages is displayed on the Control Display automatically.

Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the Check Control message in the integrated owner's manual.

"Service request" Contact the service partner.

"Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared un til the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis played again automatically.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Notes on refueling, refer to page 242.

Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating tempera ture: the pointer is in the mid dle or in the left half of the temperature display.

Seite 72

Controls Displays

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. A Check Control message is displayed in addition.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be come too hot, a Check Control message is dis played. Check the coolant level, refer to page 259.

Odometer and trip odometer Odometer, arrow 1. Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Display/reset miles Press the knob. When the ignition is switched

off, the time, external temper ature and odometer are dis played.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature External temperature warning

If the display drops to +37 / +3 , a signal sounds. A Check Control message is dis played. There is the increased danger of

ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 /+3 ,

there can be a risk of ice on roads.

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.

Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster.

Date The date is displayed in the in strument cluster. Setting the date and date format, refer to page 78.

Range After the reserve range is reached: A Check Control message is

displayed briefly. The remaining range is

shown on the computer. When a dynamic driving style is used, such

as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/

50 km, or engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.

Displaying the cruising range 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 73

Displays Controls

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Range when destination guidance is activated in the navigation system

When destination guidance is ac tivated in the navigation system, the range up to the destination is displayed.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con sumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmen tally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recovery The energy of motion of the ve hicle is converted to electrical en ergy while coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be low

ered.

Service requirements Display

The driving distance or the time to the next service is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service spe cialist. Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re quest, refer to page 234.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a le gally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

Seite 74

Controls Displays

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. " Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Create the settings. 7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto matically transmitted to your service center be fore a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear in the current driving situation.

Displays Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Symbols Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

Shift into neutral.

Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept

The following can be operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel: Current audio source. Redial on telephone. Activation of the voice activation system.

Activating a list and creating the setting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set ting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.

Seite 75

Displays Controls

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Computer Indication in the info display

The information from the com puter is shown in the Info display in the instrument cluster.

Calling up information on the info display

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig nal lever calls up the following information on the info display: Range. Average fuel consumption. Average speed. Date. Time of arrival

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Distance to destination When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Arrow view of navigation system

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the com puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated on the basis of various distances.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is dis played if a destination is entered in the naviga tion system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.

Seite 76

Controls Displays

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/ 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning" 4. Press the controller.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

Trip computer There are two types of computer. "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary. "Trip computer": the values provide an over

view of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 77

Displays Controls

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" 3. "Cons." or "Speed"

4. "Yes"

Settings on the Control Display Time

Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.

5. Press the controller. 6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes

are displayed. 7. Press the controller. The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Seite 78

Controls Displays

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re fer to page 23.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis tance and temperature:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set.

5. Press the controller.

Seite 79

Displays Controls

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Seite 80

Controls Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Lamps Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light

Control , High-beam Assistant, Welcome lamps, daytime running lights

4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam

Assistant 7 Instrument lighting

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati

cally switched off at the following switch set tings: 0, ,

Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 82.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Seite 81

Lamps Controls

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s"

4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi light or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually un der these conditions.

Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position .

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Roadside parking lamps

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Seite 82

Controls Lamps

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Adaptive light control The concept Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light towards the front pas senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active.

Self-leveling headlights The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the light distribution to the contours of the road. The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de pressions to increase visibility.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos sible.

High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys tem automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar

row. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the lights are switched on, the

high beams are switched on and off automati cally. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

Seite 83

Lamps Controls

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as

a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, man ually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres ence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir ror. Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in front of the interior rear view mirror.

Fog lamps Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 82, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Instrument lighting Adjusting

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

Seite 84

Controls Lamps

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.

Reading lamps Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. With the interior lamps shut off, the reading lamps cannot be switched on.

Bang & Olufsen High End Surround Sound System Adjusting speaker lighting, refer to page 177

Seite 85

Lamps Controls

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Safety Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Seite 86

Controls Safety

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instru ments and mobile phones.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack ets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; oth erwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un desired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is switch on, the warn ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op

erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on. The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 87

Safety Controls

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

When there is a malfunction, have the air bag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as ex pected in the event of an accident despite cor responding severity of the accident.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac cordingly.

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un

less they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen ger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas

Seite 88

Controls Safety

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front pas senger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Con trol Display.

1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if

there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset when the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pres sure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: For a mounted wheel without TPM electron

ics. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys

tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" The status is displayed.

Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires.

Seite 89

Safety Controls

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indicated by the TPM

Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.

A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency. Malfunction.

For Canadian models: additional information The status display additionally shows the cur rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera tures. When correcting the tire inflation pressures, note the following: The tire pressure increases as the tire temper ature increases. Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres sure when the tire is at the ambient temperature. Compare the displayed tire temperature with

the external temperature in the instrument clus ter.

Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed. After driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla tion pressures are applied as set values. The re setting process is completed automatically dur ing driving. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are displayed in yellow.

Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus warns based on the infla tion pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires or run-flat tires.

Seite 90

Controls Safety

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Run-flat tires, refer to page 253, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them re placed if necessary.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con tinue driving, and contact your service center.

Seite 91

Safety Controls

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Message when the system was not reset A Check Control message is displayed. The system detected a wheel change but was not reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system.

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat

tire can be detected. Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if necessary. Malfunction: have the system checked by

your service center. TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys

tem again. Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la bel, you should determine the proper tire infla tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-in

flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then re main continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.

Seite 92

Controls Safety

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. In itialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla tion pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detec

tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con firming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg ular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 253, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Seite 93

Safety Controls

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/ 80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not con tinue driving, and contact your service center.

Lane departure warning The concept This system issues a warning at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about to leave the lane on roads with lane markings. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving situation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Switching on/off

Seite 94

Controls Safety

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 40 mph/65 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated. Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can be issued.

Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning The warning ends: Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. When returning to your own lane. When braking hard. When using the turn signal.

System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,

diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.

When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

In tight curves or on narrow lanes. When the lane markings are covered by ob

jects. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes the lane departure warning to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.

Seite 95

Safety Controls

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Camera

The camera is located near the base of the mir ror. Keep windshield clean and clear in the area in front of the interior rear view mirror.

Active Blind Spot Detection The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situa tions described above. The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display

Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit ical zone.

Seite 96

Controls Safety

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

System limits Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi cle.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

Malfunctions

Steering wheel vibration Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra tion causes the system to overheat. This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be come deactivated. Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing the button.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Dirty or icy bumper. Stickers on the bumper.

A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Brake force display The concept

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 97

Safety Controls

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak ing. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situa tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to page 112.

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away with

out delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driving

without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

Seite 98

Controls Driving stability control systems

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re duced during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de activated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward momen tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un der the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads. When rocking the vehicle or driving off in

deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating DTC Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC lights up.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

Seite 99

Driving stability control systems Controls

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep down hill gradients. Without the brakes being applied, the vehicle moves at slightly more than twice walking speed. Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to ap prox. twice walking speed and then keeps its speed constant. As long as there is active braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the ve hicle during this time. Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position D or R only.

Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Specify desired speed in the range from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating.

Press up the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed increases gradually.

Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed.

Press down the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradually.

Press down the rocker switch past the point of resistance: when driving forward, the speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed decreases to ap prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED above the but ton lights up.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again and the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated

above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Seite 100

Controls Driving stability control systems

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed in the speedometer. Green: the system is actively

braking the vehicle. Orange: the system is on

standby.

Malfunction A message is displayed in the instrument clus ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated brake temperatures.

Adaptive Drive The concept Adaptive Drive includes the following systems: Dynamic Drive, refer to page 101 Dynamic Damping Control, refer to

page 101 The system increases driving stability and driv ing comfort.

Dynamic Drive The concept Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions. The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situa tions.

Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Experience Switch, refer to page 102.

SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.

COMFORT Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.

Programs The system offers three different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Experience Switch, refer to page 102.

SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb ers for greater driving agility.

COMFORT Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and SPORT programs.

COMFORT+ Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort.

Integral Active Steering The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering. Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed.

Seite 101

Driving stability control systems Controls

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas ingly reduced. The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, e.g., when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

Initializing In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

1. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steer ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle.

Using snow chains Ensure that the rear axle steering is deactivated when using snow chains, refer to page 253.

Programs The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Experience Switch, refer to page 102.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility.

COMFORT Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle re sponds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range. The stability-enhancing intervention may be de activated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.

Driving Experience Switch The concept The Driving Experience Switch can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For this purpose various programs are available for selection that are activated via the two buttons of the Driving Experience Switch and the DSC OFF-button.

Operating the programs

Press the button Program

DSC OFF TRACTION

SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT COMFORT+ ECO PRO

For Adaptive Drive or Dynamic Damper Control, the lower button is labeled with COMFORT.

Seite 102

Controls Driving stability control systems

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Automatic program change The system automatically switches to COM FORT in the following situations: Failure of Integral Active Steering. Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. The vehicle has a flat tire.

DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. The DSC system is switched off.

Deactivating DSC OFF Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis played in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated.

TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating TRACTION Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the tachom

eter. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter lights up.

Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp

go out.

Indicator/warning lamps When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION is activated.

SPORT+ Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus pension with limited driving stabilization. Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.

Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ ap pears in the tachometer and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Indicator/warning lamps SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy namic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension for greater driving agility with maximum driving sta bilization.

Seite 103

Driving stability control systems Controls

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The program can be configured to individual specifications. The configuration is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT ap pears in the tachometer.

Configuring SPORT If the display on the Control Display, refer to page 105,is activated, the sport program can be set to individual specifications. After the sport program is activated, select "Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed panel and configure the program. Optionally, the sport program can be configured before it is activated:

1. "Settings" 2. "SPORT mode"

3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when the sport program is activated.

COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta bilization.

Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer

goes out.

In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 103.

COMFORT+ Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization.

Activating COMFORT+ Press the button repeatedly until COM FORT+ appears in the tachometer.

ECO PRO Consistent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving sta bilization. Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications.

Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO"

or

1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode"

Seite 104

Controls Driving stability control systems

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected program The selected program is dis played in the tachometer.

Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs.

Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Driving mode info"

Seite 105

Driving stability control systems Controls

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accel erated automatically and simply. As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. The speed is also maintained on downhill gra dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.

Buttons at a glance

1 System on/off, interrupt 2 Resume speed 3 Store speed 4 Reduce distance 5 Store, maintain/change speed 6 Increase distance

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted,

actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Press the button.

Seite 106

Controls Driving comfort

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed. Transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. The safety belt and the driver's door are

opened when the vehicle is standing. The system has not detected objects for an

extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit tle traffic without road edge line markings.

Radar sensor is soiled.

Maintaining/storing the speed Press the button. When the system is switched on, the

current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.

Speed differences Great speed differences with vehicles

driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap proaching a truck or when another vehicle swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen sated for by the system.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Max. adjustable speed: 110 mph/180 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

Seite 107

Driving comfort Controls

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traffic

and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis played in the instrument cluster.

Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The selected distance, refer to page 109, is dis played in the instrument cluster.

Calling up the desired speed and distance

While driving Press the button with the system switched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.

While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning, engage position P of the automatic trans mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill.

Green mark in the speedometer during a brief idle phase: The vehicle ahead of you drives away while the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates without anything having to be done.

Switch to orange of the mark in the speed ometer after approx. 2 sec.: The vehicle ahead of you drives away, while the mark is orange: in order to accelerate, briefly press the gas pedal or press the RES button or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that the vehicle ahead of you has driven off. You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:

1. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the

RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed The marking lights up in

green: the system is active. The marking lights up in or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system

Seite 108

Controls Driving comfort

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

requirements for operation are currently not met.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated be cause the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Depending on how the vehicle is equip ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is

switched on.

The vehicle symbol lights up in orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for op erating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by brak

ing or making an evasive maneuver.

System limits

Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys tem on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h. The system can also be activated when station ary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa tion when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you for instance might not be detected.

Seite 109

Driving comfort Controls

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca

pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate when a sta tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic congestion. The system also does not respond to: Pedestrians or similarly slow road users. Red traffic lights. Stationary objects. Cross traffic. Approaching traffic.

No warnings A warning may not be issued when ap

proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance. This also applies to major speed differ

ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle, you yourself must react, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a considerable delay.

Seite 110

Controls Driving comfort

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

When approaching a curve, the system may re act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.

Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be hind bumps in the road.

Radar sensor

Position

Radar sensor

Dirty or covered sensor A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec tion of vehicles. If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re

move layers of snow and ice carefully. Do not cover the view field of the radar sen

sor.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note To reduce electromagnetic effects, please use properly. The standard SAR value is 2.0 W/kg; the tested value of this product is 0.751 W/kg. NCC declaration:

1. Companies or persons without authoriza tion should not change the frequency, in crease the power, or change the character istics or functions of the original design of low-power radio frequency devices with type approval.

2. Low-power radio frequency devices should not impair legal communication or flight safety. If this type of impairment is detected,

Seite 111

Driving comfort Controls

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

the device should be switched off immedi ately. In this case, please contact the man ufacturer and only use the product after the problem has been corrected.

3. The "legal communication" specified above refers to communication in accordance with telecommunication regulations. Low-power devices should withstand interference from legal communication and ISM devices.

Collision warning with braking function The concept The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision at speeds above approx. 10 mph/15 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving sit uation. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar sys tem.

When the vehicle is intentionally brought into contact with a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

Warning stages

Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the dis tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. The braking intervention is executed with lim ited braking force and for a brief period only. The intervention cannot bring the vehicle to a com plete standstill. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 98, is switched on.

Adapting your speed and driving style The acute warning does not relieve the

driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic condi tions.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov ing the steering wheel. When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions. The braking function is deactivated if the DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is deactivated.

Switching the warning function on/off

Press the button

On: the LED lights up.

Seite 112

Controls Driving comfort

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Off: the LED goes out. The state is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Configuring the prewarning After the warning function is switched on, the following can be set via the iDrive: The prewarning can be switched on/off. The time of the prewarning can be set. These settings have no effect on the time of the warning from the Active Cruise Control that prompts the driver to intervene or brake.

Display in the instrument cluster The collision warning can be issued in the in strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically.

Warning stages

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up in red: prewarn ing. Increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneu ver.

Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of

the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready

to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Detection range This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you

or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall. In tight curves.

Prewarning sensitivity Each time after the prewarning time is set, this may result in increased false warnings.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable con

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic.

Seite 113

Driving comfort Controls

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

Controls

At a glance

Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control can be used.

Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or interrupted,

actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button.

If active: press twice. If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if: The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed. Transmission position D is disengaged. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated. DSC is actively controlling stability. HDC is activated.

Maintaining/storing the current speed

Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 115. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Change, maintain speed The rocker switch can be pressed while inter rupted to maintain and store the current speed.

Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con

ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other wise, there is the danger of an accident occur ring.

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

Seite 114

Controls Driving comfort

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the

point of resistance, the desired speed in creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ 1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or deceler ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re sistance point causes the vehicle to accel erate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed Press the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip ped, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is

switched on.

Desired speed The marking lights up in

green: the system is active. The marking lights up in or

ange: the system has been interrupted.

The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

Brief status display Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met.

PDC Park Distance Control The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera, refer to page 118, can be switched on. PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or behind your vehicle are indicated with: Signal tones. Visual display.

Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front sensors and the two rear corner

sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/

1.50 m.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range.

Seite 115

Driving comfort Controls

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages. In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running.

Switching off automatically The system switches off and the LED goes out: After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for

ward. Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv

ing forward. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

Seite 116

Controls Driving comfort

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds: If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.

If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 177. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis play before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:

1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.

2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Zoom view On the left part of the display screen, the vehicle is shown enlarged.

Forward gear or transmission position D en gaged: front area of the vehicle.

Reverse gear or transmission position R en gaged: rear area of the vehicle.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.

On the Control Display, the areas in front of and behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Seite 117

Driving comfort Controls

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

When using a pressure washer, keep the sprayer moving and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors.

Surround View The concept Surround View includes the following systems: Backup camera, refer to page 118. Side View, refer to page 122. Top View, refer to page 120. It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering and on blind driveways and intersections.

Backup camera The concept The backup camera provides assistance in park ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup camera.

Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges

may not be detected by the backup camera.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 120.

Assistance functions

Functional requirement The backup camera is switched on. The trunk lid is fully closed.

Pathway lines

Can be shown in the backup camera image when in transmission position R.

Seite 118

Controls Driving comfort

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer ing wheel movements.

Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 119.

Turning circle lines

Can be shown in the backup camera image. Show the course of the smallest possible

turning circle on a level road. Only one turning circle line is displayed

when the steering wheel is turned.

Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 119.

Parking using pathway and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle

lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the backup camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.

Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines "Parking aid lines"

Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Seite 119

Driving comfort Controls

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With the backup camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the backup camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Camera

The camera lens is located under the BMW em blem of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 276.

Top View The concept Top View assists you in parking and maneuver ing. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.

Capturing the image The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera. The range equals: Approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side. approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex terior mirrors are detected early.

System limits Top View cannot be used in the following situa tions: With a door open. With the trunk lid open. With an exterior mirror folded in. In poor light. A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras.

Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.

Seite 120

Controls Driving comfort

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer to page 121.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is ac tivated.

If the backup camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to Top View:

"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Display on the Control Display

Switching on the backup camera via iDrive With Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The set ting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With Top View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With Top View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines The static, red turning circle line shows the

space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.

The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle. The pathway line is dependent on the cur rent steering angle and is continuously ad justed with the steering wheel movement.

Seite 121

Driving comfort Controls

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

"Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

Cameras

The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 276.

Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side.

System limits The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.

Display The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re sult from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary.

Display on the Control Display The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness With the Side View switched on:

1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Seite 122

Controls Driving comfort

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Cameras

The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 276.

Parking assistant The concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and accelerate or brake ac cordingly. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 115.

Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve the

driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the parking procedure. Watch the parking space and parking procedure closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Minimum length: own vehicle length plus

approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure Closed doors.

Seite 123

Driving comfort Controls

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Switching on

Using the button

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

By engaging reverse Engage transmission position R. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol in the Control Display.

Display on the Control Display

System status

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Gray: the system is not activated. Parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found.

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.

Status of the parking space search

Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.

The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active.

No display: no parking space search.

Parking using the parking assistant Personal responsibility The parking assistant does not relieve the

driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the parking procedure.

Seite 124

Controls Driving comfort

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Watch the parking space and parking procedure closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

Check the traffic situation as well Loud sounds outside and within the vehi

cle can drown out the signal tones of the parking assistant and PDC. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the dan ger of an accident.

1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if necessary. The status of the parking space search is in dicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play. The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec essary.

Notes The parking assistant takes control of steer

ing for as long as the symbol for active park ing appears on the display.

The system maneuvers the vehicle to posi tion it properly in smaller parking spaces, for example.

To achieve the best possible parking posi tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary.

When parking in parking spaces on the driv er's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time by: Grasping the steering wheel and steering

yourself.

"Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display.

Interrupting automatically The procedure is interrupted automatically: If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/

10 km/h. On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces

if necessary. If doors are open. A Check Control message is displayed.

Continuing An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if necessary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.

Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: Press the button.

Switch off the ignition.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

System limits Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by the sys tem. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure.

Seite 125

Driving comfort Controls

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci dent occurring.

Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi

cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle may become damaged.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not provide assis tance in parking. In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When sensors are dirty or iced over. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads. When leaves or snow has collected in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure,

such as fences. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasounds sensors used to measure park ing spaces are located in the side turn signals. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and main tain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Night Vision with pedestrian detection The concept Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night vision system. An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and displays the image on the Con trol Display. The picture is a heat image. The system has an integrated pedestrian detection function that detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system.

Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.

Seite 126

Controls Driving comfort

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second.

Pedestrian detection

The pedestrian detection and warning system only operates in darkness and only when a heat image is displayed. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system.

People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue.

Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian detection system operates within a range of ap prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.

Environmental influences can limit the availabil ity of pedestrian detection. If pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol is displayed in the heat image. This symbol disappears when the function be comes available again.

Warning of people in danger

If the system detects a person in the defined area in front of the vehicle and if there is the dan ger of a collision with this person, a warning symbol appears in the Control Display and Head-up Display. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.

Seite 127

Driving comfort Controls

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas. Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle. Expanded area 2 to the right and left. The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example.

Prewarning The yellow symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve

hicle.

The yellow symbol is displayed when a person detected in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left

to the central area.

Acute warning The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds. You are requested to intervene immediately by braking or making an

evasive maneuver.

Display in the Head-up Display The warning is simultaneously dis played in the Head-up Display and in the Control Display. The displayed symbol

can vary with the people detected. For people

located in the central area, the distance to the person is indicated by the size of the symbol.

System limits

Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following: On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves. When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged. In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. At very high external temperatures.

Limits of pedestrian detection Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. Limited pedestrian detection: When people are fully or partially covered,

especially when their heads are covered. When people are not in an upright position,

e.g., when lying down. Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,

recumbent bicycles). After physical damage to the system, e.g.,

after an accident.

Activation/deactivation

Press the button.

Seite 128

Controls Driving comfort

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Display

Adjustments via the iDrive With Night Vision switched on:

1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec tion.

2. Press the controller. 3. Open the desired menu item.

"Brightness" "Contrast" "Pedestrian detection"

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Camera

Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper ation. The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps. Clean the lens, refer to page 276.

Head-up Display The concept

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information with out averting his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis play is influenced by: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, check the basic set tings.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Seite 129

Driving comfort Controls

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Display

1 Lane departure warning 2 Active Cruise Control 3 Desired speed 4 Navigation system 5 Speed

The collision warning, Night Vision pedestrian warning, or Check Control messages are dis played briefly if needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Displayed information" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller.

The brightness is adjusted. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi

tionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 84. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Adjusting the height 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-up display" 3. "Height" 4. Turn the controller.

The height is adjusted. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield replaced by a service center only.

Seite 130

Controls Driving comfort

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Climate control Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left 2 Temperature, left 3 AUTO program, left 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,

left 5 Remove ice and condensation 6 Maximum cooling 7 Display 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 9 AUTO program, right 10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right 12 Seat heating, right47 13 Active seat ventilation, right47 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu

lated-air mode 15 Cooling function 16 Rear window defroster 17 ALL program 18 Active seat ventilation, left47 19 Seat heating, left47

Seite 131

Climate control Controls

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Climate control functions in detail

Note is continuously shown on the display of the

automatic climate control.

Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

Upper body region. Upper body region and footwell. Footwell. Windows and footwell: driver's side only. Windows, upper body region and footwell:

driver's side only. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the conden sation sensor.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem

perature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di

rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function, refer to page 133, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window con densation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, additionally switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.

Seite 132

Controls Climate control

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air volume and recirculated- air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re gion. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx. 32 /

0 . When the engine is running. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro gram is active.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con

trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out side air and controls the shut-off automati cally.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO but ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and

depending on the temperature setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, con densation water, refer to page 148, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time.

ALL program Press the button. Current settings on the driver's side for

the temperature, air volume, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front pas senger side. The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side are changed.

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.

Functional requirement Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been

switched off. Warm engine. The battery is sufficiently charged. External temperature below 77 /25 .

Seite 133

Climate control Controls

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side.

is shown on the display of the automatic cli mate control. The interior temperature, air volume and air dis tribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.

Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.

on the display of the automatic climate control goes out.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Complete system:

At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's

side. On the front passenger side:

At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the front

passenger side.

Switching on Press any button.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 260, of your vehicle.

Ventilation Front ventilation

Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar row 1. Toward blue: colder. Toward red: warmer.

Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar row 2.

Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3.

Adjusting the ventilation Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary. The system can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset switch-on times. It re mains switched on for 30 minutes. They can be operated via iDrive.

Seite 134

Controls Climate control

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Parked-car ventilation Using the preset switch-on time or when oper ated directly: any external temperature. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.

Preselecting the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.

Seite 135

Climate control Controls

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Interior equipment Integrated universal remote control The concept This system can replace up to three different hand-held transmitters for various types of re mote-controlled equipment, such as garage doors or lighting systems. The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro grammed on one of the three memory buttons. The corresponding device can then be operated using the programmed memory button. The LED indicates that a signal is being trans mitted. When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro grams for security reasons.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the integrated universal re mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the hand-held transmitter, the remote-controlled de

vice is generally compatible with the integrated universal remote control. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Programming

LED, arrow 1. Memory buttons, arrow 2.

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press the two outer memory buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED, ar row 1 flashes. All programs of the three memory buttons, arrow 2, are cleared.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the mem ory buttons. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of the hand-held transmitter and the memory button of the integrated universal remote control. The LED flashes slowly.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly af ter approx. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step, or, if the programming

Seite 136

Controls Interior equipment

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

was interrupted by the hand-held transmit ter, hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter again for 2 seconds.

6. To program other hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Malfunction If the device cannot be used after repeated at tempts at programming, please check whether the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an alternating code system. To do so: Read the instructions of the hand-held

transmitter. Hold down the memory button of the

integrated universal remote control longer. If the LED of the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a brief period and then lights up continuously, the hand-held transmit ter is equipped with an alternating code system. In this case, program the memory buttons as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters Please obtain information on synchronizing the device in the operating manual of the device be ing set up. Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec ond person.

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above under Fixed- code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the de vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

5. Hold down the programmed memory button of the integrated universal remote for ap prox. 3 seconds. Repeat this work step, if necessary, up to three times.

The device can be operated using the memory button with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Reassigning individual programs 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of

approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the mem ory buttons. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

3. Hold down the memory button of the integrated universal remote control.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.

Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step, or, if the programming was in terrupted by the hand-held transmitter, hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter again for 2 seconds.

Deleting all stored programs Press the two outer memory buttons for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored programs are deleted. The programs cannot be deleted individually.

Seite 137

Interior equipment Controls

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Manual-shift transmission: opening

Press on the cover.

Automatic transmission: opening

Press the button.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote con trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn them selves.

Connecting electrical devices Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Manual transmission: center console

Press on the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Automatic transmission: center console

Press the button. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 138

Controls Interior equipment

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

In the front passenger footwell

Socket is located below the glove compartment. To access the socket: fold open the cover.

Center armrest

Cover.

Ski bag Capacity The ski bag makes it possible to transport two pairs of skis up to a length of 6 ft/2.10 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag 1. Pull the release in the direction of the arrow,

and remove the insert from the front. If nec

essary, when pulling the release, press against the insert.

2. Lay out the ski bag. 3. Press button in the cargo area, open tail

board and attach to the rear wall via mag netic holder.

4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the sharp edges of the skis.

5. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bag Secure the ski bag by tightening the re

taining strap; otherwise, the contents could present a source of danger to the passengers, for example during braking or evasive maneu vers.

Seite 139

Interior equipment Controls

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Stowing the ski bag Proceed in the reverse order of loading. When replacing the insert, place both pins into the rail at the bottom and press the insert back in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.

Seite 140

Controls Interior equipment

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior: Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 141. Storage compartment on the center con

sole: manual transmission. Storage compartment in the center armrest,

refer to page 142. Compartments in the doors. Pockets on the backrests of the front seats. Net in the front passenger footwell.

No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com partment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for in stance during braking and avoidance maneu vers.

Glove compartment Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.

Closing Fold up the cover.

USB interface for data transfer

Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31. Music collection, refer to page 194.

Observe the following when connecting:

Seite 141

Storage compartments Controls

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Center armrest Opening A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

Press the buttons next to the lock.

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately se cure the trunk lid, refer to page 38, for example.

After the storage compartment is locked, the re mote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at a hotel.

This prevents access to the storage compart ment and to the cargo area.

Connection for an external audio device

This can be used to connect an external audio device, such as an MP3 player.

AUX-IN port, refer to page 199. USB audio interface, refer to page 199.

Cupholders Notes

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam age.

Seite 142

Controls Storage compartments

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Manual transmission: center console

A cupholder is located on the center console.

Manual transmission: center armrest

A cupholder is located in the center armrest compartment. To open: press the buttons next to the lock.

Automatic transmission: center console

To open: press on the cover.

Storage compartments in the cargo area Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the rear cargo area trim.

Lashing eyes To secure the cargo, refer to page 150, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Storage compartment under the cargo floor cover

Raise the cargo floor cover using the strap.

Seite 143

Storage compartments Controls

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful

in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, in the event of an accident or braking or evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Greatly increase the blower speed. Drive moderately.

Seite 146

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. When driv ing, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot ex haust system and any highly flammable materi als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Climate control windshield

The marked area is not covered with heat re flective coating. Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile commu nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec tronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec trical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving

Seite 147

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency. Manual transmission: You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Automatic transmission: You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down in the manual mode of the auto matic transmission, refer to page 66.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos sibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con densation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal.

Seite 148

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Loading Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carrying

capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and in creases the rate at which damage develops in side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard: The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve

hicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Seite 149

Loading Driving tips

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Stowing cargo

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the cargo area separating wall.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Cover sharp edges and corners.

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.

Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.

Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as

described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu pants.

Seite 150

Driving tips Loading

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start ing on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en gine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the en gine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Seite 151

Saving fuel Driving tips

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient gear.

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac celerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is switched off for only approx. 4 seconds. The Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function of your vehicle automatically switches off the en gine during a stop.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win dow defroster require a lot of energy and con sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop- and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your serv ice center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem, refer to page 260.

ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving in a manner that optimizes fuel consumption. The extension of the range that is achieved as a result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Activating ECO PRO Button should be pressed and held until ECO PRO is displayed in the instru

ment cluster.

Display in the instrument cluster

ECO PRO bonus range An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driving style. This is displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

Driving style In the tachometer, a mark in the bar indicator indicates the cur rent efficiency of the driving style corresponding to the accelerator pedal position.

Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range.

Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

The display switches to blue as soon as all con ditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met.

Seite 152

Driving tips Saving fuel

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction The arrow indicates that the driv ing style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator.

Additional symbols

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed.

Automatic transmission: switch from S to D or avoid manual shift interven tions.

Manual shift transmission: follow shifting instructions.

Manual shift transmission: engage neutral for engine stop.

Configuring ECO PRO 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" 4. Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip "ECO PRO limit:":

Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed.

"ECO PRO speed warning": A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.

ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi cient. The following settings are optimized: Cooling or heat output of the automatic cli

mate control Exterior mirror heating Seat heating

ECO PRO Potential The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is dis played.

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics Information on fuel consumption and technol ogy can be displayed during driving.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be displayed within an adjustable time frame.

"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history 1. "Options" Open. 2. "Reset consumption history"

Seite 153

Saving fuel Driving tips

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics Info" The following systems are displayed: Automatic engine start/stop function. Energy recovery. Climate control output.

Seite 154

Driving tips Saving fuel

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 155

Saving fuel Driving tips

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to

your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Navigation Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Navigation system General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradic tion between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Starting navigation system

1. Press the button on the controller. 2. "Navigation"

The navigation system can also be ac cessed directly with the button on the con

troller.

Destination input Manual destination entry

General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 21. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. If the existing entries should not be changed,

the entries for the state/province and town/ city can be skipped.

Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Seite 158

Navigation Navigation

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the town/city name from the list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/

cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city. If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street.

3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the specified city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" the displayed country.

All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is dis played after the street name.

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.

Seite 159

Navigation Navigation

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 165.

Address book

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these have been checked as destinations. If the mobile phone does not display the contacts with addresses, they must first be checked as a destination, refer to page 232.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Options" Open.

5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"

6. Select an existing contact, if available. 7. "Business address" or "Home address" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name". 9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position

to contact"

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last names.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Seite 160

Navigation Navigation

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. Highlight the entry. 4. "Options" Open. 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 231.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations

At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. The destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"

Editing the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations

Opening the search for special destinations To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or tourist attractions:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.

Online Search 1. "Google Local Search" 2. Select a special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"

Seite 161

Navigation Navigation

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City"

Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

6. "Keyword" 7. Enter the keyword.

A list of the special destinations is displayed. 8. Select a special destination.

Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.

9. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 165.

"Start search": if a search term is not entered, the search is repeated with the previous search term.

Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City"

Select or enter the town/city. 3. "Category" 4. Select the category. 5. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple cat egory details can be selected. Move the

controller to the left to leave the category details.

6. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is displayed.

7. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connection can be established if necessary.

8. Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 165.

Display of special destinations List of special destinations: special destinations are organized by distance and are displayed with a directional arrow to the special destination. on the split screen, special destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category.

Destination entry via BMW Assist A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 234.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Options" Open.

Seite 162

Navigation Navigation

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. "Display Points of Interest" 5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is indi cated on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the controller. To shift the map: move the controller in

the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the

controller in the required direction and turn it.

Specifying the street If the system does not recognize a street, one of the following is displayed: The name of a street in the vicinity. The county. The coordinates of the destination.

Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed.

Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 165.

"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.

"View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"

"Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed.

"Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed.

"Find points of interest": the search for spe cial destinations is started.

Destination entry by voice

General information Instructions for voice activation system, re

fer to page 22. When making a destination entry by voice,

you can change between voice operation and iDrive.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands

Saying the entries the town/city, street, and house number can

be entered as a single command. Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in

tersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 79.

Seite 163

Navigation Navigation

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Example: to enter a town/city in a US state as a whole word, the language of the system must be English.

Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ.

Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

The options available for entering data de pend on the navigation data and the country and language settings.

entering an address using a command

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Enter address 3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address in the suggested order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g., the town/city.

Entering a town/city separately The name of the town/city can be said as a word or spelled out. With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. City or Spell city. 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city. 4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least

the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit ies may be suggested.

5. Select the town/city. To select a recommended town/

city: Yes

To select a different town/city: New entry

Select an entry: Entry ... e.g., entry 2 To spell an entry: Spell city

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.

1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ... e.g., En try 2.

2. Select the desired town/city.

Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.

Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to number 2,000 can be en tered.

1. House number 2. Say the house number.

Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations

New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. 4. "Guidance"

Seite 164

Navigation Navigation

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

5. "Enter new destination" 6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"

The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located in the desired position in the list.

6. Press the controller.

Starting the trip 1. After all intermediate destinations are en

tered, highlight the first destination. If the second destination, for example, is highlighted when destination guidance is started, the first destination is skipped.

2. "Start guidance" This symbol marks the active leg of the

trip.

Store the trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips to be able to store new trips.

1. "Options" Open. 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter the name. 4. "OK"

Select the stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select a stored trip. 4. "Start guidance"

Reversing the direction of travel Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list.

1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Intermediate destination options 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.

"Edit destination" "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an

intermediate destination to another po sition in the list.

"Delete dest. in the trip" "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not available for certain trips.

Delete the stored trip 1. "Stored trips" 2. Highlight the desired trip.

Seite 165

Navigation Navigation

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Options" Open. 4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Open the last trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"

Destination guidance Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 158. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermedi

ate destination and the estimated time of ar rival are displayed in the map view.

The arrow view is shown in the instrument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and on the Control Display where appropriate.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria.

The route criteria can be changed when the destination is entered and during destina tion guidance.

Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when plan ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on personal ex perience.

The settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 172.

Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest pos sible route and the fastest roads.

"ECO PRO route": optimized com bination of the fastest and shortest route.

"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.

"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive route guidance.

Seite 166

Navigation Navigation

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The individual suggestions are high lighted in color.

5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided

wherever possible. "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided

where possible.

Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on

the Control Display. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 168. Arrow view in the Head-up Display., refer to

page 129

Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: current direction of travel. Street name of the currently traveled street. Small arrow: indicates the next change in di

rection. Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction.

Street name at the next change in direction.

Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an

other lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying list of route sections When the destination guidance is started, a list of route sections can be displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Highlight route section.

The route section is displayed on the split screen.

Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for"

4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo meters within which you would like to return to the original route.

5. Press the controller.

Seite 167

Navigation Navigation

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated, and if nec essary gas stations along the route are dis played.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station.

The position of the gas station is displayed on the split screen.

5. Select the gas station. 6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to

the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.

Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Voice instructions"

Repeating spoken instructions 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.

Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume button while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.

Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 20, for quick ac cess.

Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

At a glance

1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field

Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different col ors and styles depending on their classification. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con nections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.

Seite 168

Navigation Navigation

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indicate route sections with traffic obstructions, depend ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian gles indicates the direction of the obstruction. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the

planned route or direction. Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not

affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 170.

Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.

Status fields Show/hide: press the controller. Upper status field: time, telephone, and en

tertainment details. Lower status field: symbol for active desti

nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar The following functions are available in the func tion bar:

Symbol Function

Start/end destination guidance.

Switch spoken instructions on/ off.

Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destination.

Display traffic bulletins.

Interactive map.

Set the map view.

Change the scale.

To change to the function bar, move the con troller to the left.

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

To shift the map diagonally: move the con troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller.

Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played. The map shows the entire route be tween the current location and the destination.

Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Settings" Set the map view. "Day/night mode"

Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.

"Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed in a scale of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

"Perspective view in 3D"

Seite 169

Navigation Navigation

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins, refer to page 170. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for split screen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen.

1. "Options" Open. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly

until the split screen is selected. 4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. 5. Select the map view.

"Arrow display" "Map facing north" "Map direction of travel" "Map view with perspective" "Position" "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive

ways are displayed three dimensionally. Setting in some cases will affect the dis play in the Head-Up Display.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: select the split screen

and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta

tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Informa tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real-

time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Network) holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to re produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic in cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to li censee as is, and where is. Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the li censed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the li censed material (including, without limita tion, that the licensed material will be error- free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, im plied or statutory, including, without limita tion, the implied warranties of merchanta

Seite 170

Navigation Navigation

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

bility, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or inci dental damages (including, without limita tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limita tions apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict li ability). Some states do not allow the exclu sion or limitation of incidental or consequen tial damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.

The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that affect the calculated route.

Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Opening the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"

First the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their distance from the current po sition of the vehicle.

4. Select a traffic bulletin.

"More information": display additional information.

5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if required.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indication on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. Day/night mode is not taken into ac count in this setting. Symbols and special des tinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: congestion. Orange: stop-and-go traffic. Yellow: heavy traffic. Green: clear roads. Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc

tion site. The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.

Seite 171

Navigation Navigation

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis played on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route

are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no

tify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid den.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins Detour suggestions from the navigation system can be manually accepted in the semi-dynamic destination guidance. In the dynamic destina tion guidance, they are automatically accepted in the route guidance.

Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active. The destination guidance system takes the available traffic information into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. When there is a traffic obstruction, if possible, a

detour is offered. In addition, distance and time differences between the original route and the detour are displayed. To accept the detour:

"Detour" In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob

structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on

the map. Depending on road type and the kind and

extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.

Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.

To activate dynamic destination guidance:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Dynamic guidance"

Navigation data Information on the navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. "Options" Open.

Seite 172

Navigation Navigation

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Navigation system version": information on the data version is displayed.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your service center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be up dated. Depending on the data volume, a data up

date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. During the update, only the basic functions

of the navigation system are available. The status of the update can be viewed. The system restarts after the update. The data carrier with the navigation data can

be removed after the update is complete.

Perform an update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis

play. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga

tion DVD and change the DVD if needed. After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc tions on the Control Display.

Viewing the status

1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation update"

What to do if... The current transmission position cannot be

displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi

tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guidance.

The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.

Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi cation on the control display is switched to shades of gray. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to cal culate a new route suggestion.

Seite 173

Navigation Navigation

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Entertainment The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when

receiving radio and television stations and playing CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tone Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information The tone control and speaker lighting settings are stored for the currently used remote control.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.

Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 176

Entertainment Tone

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Multi-channel playback, surround Choose between stereo and multi-channel play back, surround.

Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround"

When surround is activated, multi-channel play back is simulated when a stereo audio track is played.

Bang & Olufsen High End Surround Sound System Tone control 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Bang & Olufsen" 4. Select the desired tone settings.

"Studio": studio tone settings. "Expanded": open space tone settings.

Adjusting speaker lighting All speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The lighting can be individually set.

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

3. "Bang & Olufsen" 4. Select the desired lighting setting.

"Off": no lighting. "Reduced": all speakers in the field of

view are hidden while driving. "On": all speakers are always illumi

nated.

Center speaker An additional speaker is present on the dash board. When Entertainment is switched on, it switches off automatically and is illuminated ac cording to the lighting setting. If Entertainment is switched off or muting is ac tivated, the speaker breaks back in.

Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume

control. With Bang & Olufsen High End Surround

Sound System: Automatic adjustment of the volume depending on the driving noises, e. g. wind noises, that can be heard in the interior.

"PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared to the entertainment sound output.

"Gong": volume of the signal, e. g., the safety belt reminder, compared to the entertain ment sound output.

"Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone call.

"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

Seite 177

Tone Entertainment

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

Seite 178

Entertainment Tone

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Radio Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Change entertainment sources 2 Change station/track 3 Programmable memory buttons 4 Volume, on/off 5 Change wave band

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

All saved stations are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Changing the station Press the button.

Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 179

Radio Entertainment

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

RDS RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. License conditions HD Radio technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For eign Patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq uity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. Due to time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the ar tist.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station also

broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

Seite 180

Entertainment Radio

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is interrupted for an extended period, it switches back to the main station.

Weather Band General information The availability of the Weather Band and the number of available channels can vary depend ing on the region.

Switching on the Weather Band 1. "Radio" 2. "Weather band" 3. Select the desired channel.

Additional information Weather Band is a service of the National Oce anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Additional information on the Internet: www.nws.noaa.gov.

Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Symbol Function

Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory.

5. Select the desired channel.

Seite 181

Radio Entertainment

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the chan nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription"

5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via iDrive 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate

gory. 4. Select the desired channel.

Via the buttons on the center console Press the button. The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired channel

is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again.

Seite 182

Entertainment Radio

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

6. Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a de lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer

is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

The red arrow shows the current playback position.

The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar. For live transmissions: "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac tivated

Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system.

Seite 183

Radio Entertainment

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate:

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift" To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur rently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites"

4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds: "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played. If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor

ites.

Seite 184

Entertainment Radio

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:" Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad cast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes Reception may not be available in some sit

uations, such as under certain environmen tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

Seite 185

Radio Entertainment

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the program mable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. "Options" Open. 5. "Delete entry"

Seite 186

Entertainment Radio

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

CD/multimedia Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Change the entertainment source 2 CD/DVD drive 3 Eject CD/DVD 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons 6 Volume, on/off

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

CD/DVD Playback

Loading the CD/DVD player Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.

Starting playback A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

... DVD changer

Playable formats DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-

RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.

CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD.

Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A.

Seite 187

CD/multimedia Entertainment

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

CD/DVD removal

1. Press the button. The CD/DVD is partially ejected.

2. Remove the CD/DVD.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired track is played.

Selecting a track via iDrive

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Interpret. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD. File name of track.

Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Seite 188

Entertainment CD/multimedia

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. "Options" Open. 5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: All tracks in the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Automatic repeat The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto matically.

Video playback

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on the DVD.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

Code Region

6 China

0 All regions

Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a DVD with video content. 4. "DVD menu"

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a CD with video content. 4. "Select track" 5. Select the desired track.

Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller dur ing playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

Seite 189

CD/multimedia Entertainment

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu.

Start playback.

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev ery time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu. 2. "DVD menu"

The DVD menu is displayed. The display de pends on the contents of the DVD.

3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it.

To change to the video menu: turn the controller and press it.

DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD.

Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

Selecting the subtitles The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not

display subtitles".

Setting the brightness, contrast and color 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings"

Seite 190

Entertainment CD/multimedia

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting a track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track. VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track" 2. Select the desired track.

Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

DVD changer

In the glove compartment

Pull the handle.

Controls and displays

1 Empty DVD compartments 2 LED on DVD slot 3 Buttons for DVD compartments

Seite 191

CD/multimedia Entertainment

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

4 DVD slot 5 Fill DVD compartments

Filling the DVD compartments individually

1. Press the button. The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.

2. Select another compartment if necessary. 3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash. 4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.

The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and placed into the selected compartment.

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

Filling all empty DVD compartments

1. Hold the button down. The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.

2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin flashing and then insert each CD or DVD into the center of the slot. The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically and placed into the vacant compartments.

Sliding in CDs/DVDs Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs

on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/ DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged. Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this may cause it to jam and prevent it from being able to eject again.

After they are inserted, it may take several mi nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.

Removing a single CD/DVD

1. Press the button. 2. Select the DVD compartment.

The CD/DVD is partially ejected. 3. Remove the CD/DVD.

Removing all CDs/DVDs

1. Hold the button down. 2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.

Malfunctions If all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap idly, a malfunction has occurred. To eliminate the malfunction:

1. Press one of the buttons:

The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected. 2. Remove the CD/DVD. The DVD changer is functional again after the LEDs stop flashing rapidly.

Audio playback The audio track of a DVD can be played back even if video playback is not possible in the ve hicle. Only the main film without the previews or extras can be played back.

Starting playback A DVD is located in the DVD changer.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD.

Seite 192

Entertainment CD/multimedia

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Selecting a chapter using the button Press the button repeatedly until the desired chapter is played.

Selecting a chapter using iDrive 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Select the desired chapter.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired DVD. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Audio/language" 6. Select the desired language.

Notes

CD/DVD player and changer Do not remove the cover BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage may occur.

CDs and DVDs Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepar able damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.

Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions CD/DVD changers and players have been

optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with

home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.

Seite 193

CD/multimedia Entertainment

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Music collection Storing music

General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com

pressed audio format. If available, informa tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC formats are stored. Individual tracks and di

rectories can be deleted later, Deleting a track and directory, refer to page 198. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back.

Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other

wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disk.

Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Gracenote.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec ognition technology and related content deliv ery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend ing. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the

Seite 194

Entertainment CD/multimedia

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

storage process, the tracks are played in se quence. Observe the following during the storage proc ess: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without inter rupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this informa

tion is available in the vehicle database or on the CD. To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment. Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi

ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.

Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment, refer to page 141.

2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information

Seite 195

CD/multimedia Entertainment

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 197.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Music search"

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry: Select "A-Z search", refer to page 21,

and input the desired entry. Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search using spoken instructions Instructions for the voice activation system, re fer to page 22.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Music search 3. Open the desired category, e.g., Select

artist. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: Title .... Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in a single command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search, or the album that was selected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Seite 196

Entertainment CD/multimedia

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if pos sible.

4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is not available, it can be changed later if desired.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Seite 197

CD/multimedia Entertainment

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours.

Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur ing a long trip.

1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter

face in the glove compartment. 3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device, the existing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB"

Seite 198

Entertainment CD/multimedia

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

External devices At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Mobile phone audio interface

Bluetooth audio

AUX-IN port

At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is located in the center armrest. Connect the headphones or line-out connector of the device to the jack plug.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary "External devices". 4. "AUX front"

Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs mark edly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary "External devices". 3. "AUX front" 4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/mobile phone audio interface

At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play

Seite 199

CD/multimedia Entertainment

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

Connection via snap-in adapter when equip ped with extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.

Due to the large number of different audio devi ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is opera ble on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio de vices/mobile phones.

Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3. WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC, M4A. Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface

USB audio interface is located in the center arm rest.

Connect using a flexible adapter cable. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface

USB audio interface is located in the center arm rest.

Connect using a flexible adapter cable to protect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmit ted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist ing music tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Seite 200

Entertainment CD/multimedia

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.

The playback starts with the first track. On the split screen, the CD cover for the music track might be displayed after a few seconds.

Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if

available, composer, album, track. In addition, for USB devices: file directory

and, if available, composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or

"Artist". All entries are displayed in a list. Open "A-Z search" and input the de

sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed.

Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis played.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists Calling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices"

Seite 201

CD/multimedia Entertainment

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Options" Open. 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback

At a glance Video playback via snap-in adapter is possible. Operation can be performed via iDrive. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Playback The video image is displayed on the front Con trol Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/ h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the parking brake is set or if the automatic trans mission is in position P.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Video" 5. Select the directory if necessary.

To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

6. Select the desired video file to begin play back.

Video menu

Symbol Function

Next video file

Previous video file Double-click on an icon to play back previous video file.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem

peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied with

a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not additionally con nect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be compromised.

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re

charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio

At a glance Music files on external devices such as audio

devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 211.

The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.

The volume of the sound output is depend ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements The device is suitable. Information under

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on.

Seite 202

Entertainment CD/multimedia

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to page 211, and on the device.

Bluetooth presettings must be made on the device, such as for a connection without confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.

A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass key. It is only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer to the device operating instructions: e.g. search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".

9. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an audio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 205.

Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue tooth.

Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

Seite 203

CD/multimedia Entertainment

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices. 5. "Options" Open. 6. "Configure phone" 7. "Audio" 8. "OK"

Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices.

White symbol : the device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information The display of music track information de

pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or

iDrive. Playback is interrupted when data is ex

changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec essary.

Playback menu Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available.

Symbol Function

Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone"

6. "Audio" 7. "OK"

Seite 204

Entertainment CD/multimedia

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update, refer to

page 205, if needed. The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device

and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or vehicle? Delete connections with other devices if necessary.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The device no longer reacts? Switch the de vice off and on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure. Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music

data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.

Switch the radio off and on again.

Music files can only be played back softly. Adjust the volume settings on the device. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other signal

tones on the device. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automatically. Switch the radio off and on again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone. Disconnect one of the two connections; for

example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 204, and restart playback.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can support new cell phones or new external devices. The updating of the software is done via: USB.

Updates and related current information is available at www.bmw.com/update.

Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Show current version" SelectDesired version to displayAdditional in formation.

Seite 205

CD/multimedia Entertainment

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the ve hicle is stationary.

1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.

2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in terface of the USB audio interface in the center armrest. An update via the USB in terface in the glove compartment is not pos sible.

3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software"

6. "Start update" 7. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.

Restoring the previous version If it should become necessary, the software ver sion prior to the last software update can be re stored. The previous version may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.

Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restoredBMW Assist, Office

functions and the connected devices are tem porarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.

Seite 206

Entertainment CD/multimedia

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 207

CD/multimedia Entertainment

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Communication All of the options available to you for mobile

communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in

this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Telephone Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are inside the ve hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel, and via voice activation. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operation of the audio functions, refer to page 202. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users.

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside an

tenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue tooth.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mo bile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction. A software update can be performed if neces sary.

Seite 210

Communication Telephone

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Notes At high temperatures, the charge function of the mobile phone can be limited where appropriate and the functions are no longer executed. When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, heed the operating manual of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele

phone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,

refer to page 203.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be made

on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maximum

of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Activating/deactivating the additional functions Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 210, that sup port these functions.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. Select the desired additional function.

"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"

6. "OK" As long as an additional function is deactivated, it cannot be assigned to a telephone.

Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, refer to page 214. While a call is active on the additional telephone, incoming calls are displayed on the Control Display.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Pairing and connecting cell phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta tionary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

Seite 211

Telephone Communication

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Add new phone" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: e.g. search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display. Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en ter the same Bluetooth passkey.

6. Enter the passkey and confirm.

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.

Symbol Function

Telephone.

Additional telephone.

Audio source.

Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con nected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer to page 213.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone.

Four mobile phones can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in some

mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected. If a different detected cell phone is connected with the vehicle. A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con

nected. The functions assigned to the mobile phone be fore unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. If the mobile phone is already connected, these functions are deacti vated.

Configuring cell phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

Seite 212

Communication Telephone

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config ured.

4. "Options" Open. 5. "Configure phone" 6. At least one function must be selected.

"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Audio"

7. "OK" If a function is assigned to a mobile phone, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a mobile phone that is already connected and the mobile phone will be unpaired.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional tel ephone can be swapped automatically.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing the mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be un

paired. 4. "Options" Open. 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the

same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con nections with other devices if necessary.

Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining battery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap- in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one cell phone can be con nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected cell phone from the vehicle and pair and con nect only one cell phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Ambient temperatures too high or too low?

Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional

telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the function.

Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

No or not all phone book entries are displayed, or they are incomplete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries being stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e.g., due to stored information such as

Seite 213

Telephone Communication

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline or service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the vol ume of the called party. Depending on the mo bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone. The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or

"Loudspeak." 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to the additional telephone is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.

Accepting a call

Via iDrive "Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster "Accept"

Rejecting a call

Via iDrive "Reject"

Seite 214

Communication Telephone

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Via the instrument cluster "Reject"

Ending a call

Via iDrive "End call"

Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number When entering phone numbers, you can switch between entering letters and numbers. Service numbers can be entered more easily, e. g. 1-888-BMW-CARD.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Convert to letters as required. Select the symbol.

Select the letters individually. 5. Select the symbol.

Select symbol to convert to numbers. The phone number can also be entered by voice. Only numbers can be spoken.

Letter/number assignment

Letter Number

ABC 2

DEF 3

GHI 4

JKL 5

MNO 6

PQRS 7

TUV 8

WXYZ 9

Calls with multiple participants

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Seite 215

Telephone Communication

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded where appropri ate.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call The active call is displayed in color. The call on hold is displayed in gray.

"Swap calls" The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call" When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute" A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling devi ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

Seite 216

Communication Telephone

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone num ber.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone with out reception or network, or Service Request is active.

For contacts with one stored phone number: se lect the required contact. The connection is es tablished. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is established.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are displayed. The sorting order of the phone numbers depends on the particular mo bile phone.

Dialing the number via the instrument cluster This is possible when there is no active call.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.

Dialing a number via iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial" 3. Select the desired entry and the phone num

ber if necessary. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The erasure of entries depends on the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"

Seite 217

Telephone Communication

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

5. Complete the entries if necessary. 6. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".

Received calls

Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The erasure of entries depends on the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Delete entry" or"Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 5. Complete the entries if necessary. 6. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system au tomatically switches to the hands-free system. If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis play; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Voice operation Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys tem: operation, refer to page 22. Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation system: depending on the equipment, the mo bile phone can be voice operated as described below. The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual does not apply to this type of voice op eration.

Seite 218

Communication Telephone

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

The concept The mobile phone can be operated without

taking your hands from the steering wheel. In many cases, the entries are accompanied

by announcements or questions. ... Verbal instructions for voice operation.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud Press the button. Help. Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or combined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.

Using alternative commands The system often recognizes a number of dif ferent commands to run a function; for instance: Dial name or Name

Example: dialing a phone number

1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Dial number The system says: Please say the number

3. E.g., 123 456 790

The system says: 123 456 790. Continue?

4. Dial The system says: Dialing number

Calling

Dialing a phone number 1. Dial number 2. Say the phone number. 3. Dial

Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. Correct number The command can be repeated as often as nec essary.

Deleting a phone number Delete All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Redialing Redial

Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice activa tion and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Saving an entry 1. Save name 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking

duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being prompted

to do so by the system. 4. Save

Seite 219

Telephone Communication

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Deleting an entry 1. Delete name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.

Deleting all entries 1. Delete phonebook

The dialog for deleting the phone book is opened.

2. Confirm the query with Yes. 3. Confirm the query again with Yes.

Reading and selecting entries 1. Read phonebook

The dialog for reading the phone book is opened.

2. Say Dial number when the desired entry is read.

Selecting an entry 1. Dial name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do so. 3. Confirm the query with Yes.

Adjusting the volume Turn the knob during an announcement. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Notes Do not use the voice operation to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un necessarily delay the establishment of a tele phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 267, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the system. The language for the mobile phone voice operation is preset and cannot be changed in the Control Display.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Snap-in adapter General information Detailed information about snap-in adapter, which supports the functions of the mobile phone, available from the service center.

Notes At high temperatures, the charge function of the mobile phone can be limited where appropriate and the functions are no longer executed. When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, heed the operating manual of the mobile phone.

Installation position In the center armrest.

Inserting the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.

Seite 220

Communication Telephone

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con nector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac ing up in the direction of the electrical con nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar row 2 until it engages.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 221

Telephone Communication

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Office Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand ards. Information about which mobile phones support Office functions can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number of compatible mobile phones is available for Of fice. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.

Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traf fic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.

The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 78, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone to correctly display appointments, for example.

Office is activated, refer to page 211.

Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated separately.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",

"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Update data"

Cell phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.

Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Seite 222

Communication Office

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Contacts Note If equipped with full mobile phone preparation package.

At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 21. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle" When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the vehi cle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con

Seite 223

Office Communication

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact

General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "New contact"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. In the navigation system: enter address.

Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehicle can be entered. This en sures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.

If necessary, "Accept address". 9. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses.

Symbol Meaning

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Mobile phone number.

Other phone number.

Home address.

Business address.

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting order.

Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic

Seite 224

Communication Office

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or de activated.

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 31. The contacts stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those from the mobile phone.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can not be deleted.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts". 6. If necessary. "Yes"

Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e- mails may not be supported by the service pro vider, or the function may need to be enabled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Mes sages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi tional telephone are not transmitted.

Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message.

Symbol Message type

Text messages.

My Info

Message from the Concierge serv ice.

Message from BMW Info.

E-mail from mobile phone.

Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered, when more than one type of message exists.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the type of message. "All"

All messages are displayed. "E-mail"

Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.

"Service message" Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service, My Info and BMW Info are displayed.

"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

Seite 225

Office Communication

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service, My Info, and BMW Info can be deleted. Delete a message:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. "Options" Open. 5. "Delete message" Delete all messages:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Delete all messages" or"Delete service

messages"

Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.

Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 229.

Reading the text message out loud Read the text messages out loud, refer to page 230.

My Info

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.

1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":

If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.

"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.

Message from the Concierge service

Starting destination guidance 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

Dialing the number in the message Up to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with a message.

1. Select the desired message. 2. "Call":

Seite 226

Communication Office

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

If the message contains a number, the con nection is established.

"Select phone number": If the message contains more than one num ber, select the desired number from the list. The connection is established.

Storing an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Displaying additional information 1. Select the desired message. 2. "Further information"

BMW Info

General information Messages from BMW regarding service actions and news from BMW.

Displaying the message

Select the desired message. The following functions are available:

Symbol Function

"Further information" Detailed information about a mes sage is displayed. This does not re sult in any costs.

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Symbol Function

"Call" If the message contains a number, the connection is established.

"Select phone number" If the message contains more than one number, select the desired num ber from the list. The connection is established.

E-mail

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans mitted by the mobile phone, this information is displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 229.

Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office" 2. "Messages"

Seite 227

Office Communication

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

3. "Options" Open. 4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of the email from the cell phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading the e-mail out loud Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 230.

Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"

The appointments on the current day are displayed.

Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.

2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"

Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces

sary: Turn the controller.

Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 229.

Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 230.

Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.

1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"

Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)"* "Subject" "Due date"

Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Seite 228

Communication Office

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 229.

Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud, refer to page 230.

Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 229.

Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud, refer to page 230.

Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.

Using contact data At a glance Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails and notes can be stored or selected.

Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display the contact or select the phone

number: Select the contact to display contact de

tails. Select the phone number to establish a

connection directly.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad

dress. 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new

contact"

Seite 229

Office Communication

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Reading out loud Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during read ing: "Pause"

Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.

"Back to beginning" Start reading message again from the be ginning.

Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.

Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.

To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 210. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played. The mobile phone is not capable of the

missing function or is not connected cor rectly.

The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi

tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or are

more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed

or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.

Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set

on the Control Display and mobile phone. The e-mail attachment is not displayed. E-mails are transmitted without an attach

ment. Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the mo

bile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile phone

and vehicle may take several minutes. The contact pictures are not being displayed? Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in

the vehicle. The E-mail is displayed with a delay? Check the e-mail settings on the mobile

phone and adjust if necessary. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline or service center.

Seite 230

Communication Office

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Contacts Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Note If not equipped with mobile phone complete preparation package.

General information Contacts can be created and edited and the ad dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav igation.

New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 21. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: Enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the vehi cle can be entered. This ensures that desti nation guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

7. If necessary, "Store". 8. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

Seite 231

Contacts Communication

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 21. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes"

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. "Options" Open. 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name"

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via the Personal Profile, refer to page 31.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Seite 232

Communication Contacts

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

ConnectedDrive Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

BMW Assist General information BMW Assist provides you with certain services, e.g., transmission of the position data of your vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request has been initiated. Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi vidually agreed upon contract. After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without your having to visit a service center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.

Requirements The installed BMW Assist system is logged

in to a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmit ting the services.

To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your service center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.

BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection to the BMW As sist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

Automatic Collision Notification: under cer tain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW As sist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if as sistance is needed in the event of a break down. If possible, the vehicle and position data are transmitted in the process.

Customer Relations: connection with Cus tomer Relations for information on all as pects of your vehicle.

TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmit ted to your service center, either automati cally before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex ample, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter mine its position.

In addition to these services, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information for route planning, traffic, and weather. A limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center with Critical Calling if, for example, the mobile phone is not available or dis charged.

Seite 233

ConnectedDrive Communication

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

TeleService General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. Data on the vehicle's service requirements

can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve hicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.

The service varies by country. Connection costs may ensue. Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements BMW Assist is activated. Wireless reception is available. The ignition is switched on.

Use of TeleService The TeleServices are typically activated in the vehicle. Even TeleService Customer Service is not ac tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is still possible. To continue using or to deactivate the services, please contact your service partner or the BMW customer hotline.

Concierge service General information The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels

can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Convenience Plan.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service" A voice connection is established with the BMW Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.

Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via a Check Control message, refer to page 72.

Start Roadside Assistance without BMW Assist or TeleServices 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a con

Seite 234

Communication ConnectedDrive

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

nection is established to Roadside Assis tance.

Start Roadside Assistance with BMW Assist or TeleServices

General information If the vehicle is equipped with TeleServices, support is first offered through TeleService Di agnosis and, where applicable, then through TeleService Help.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance" 3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically. After the data are transmitted, the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab lished.

BMW Search At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Search. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun tries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan. The date setting, refer to page 78, on the

Control Display is current. The vehicle is located within wireless net

work coverage.

Starting BMW Search 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"

3. If necessary, "OK". The BMW Search home page is displayed.

Operating BMW Search To start a search: Turn the controller to highlight an element. Press the controller to display an element.

Seite 235

ConnectedDrive Communication

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Opening the start page 1. "Options" Open. 2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. "Options" Open. 2. "Update"

Cancel 1. "Options" Open. 2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicles not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" The Customer Relations phone number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec tion is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"

Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to re quest the arrangement of a service appoint ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request" 3. "Start service"

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 72.

Seite 236

Communication ConnectedDrive

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your service partner prior to the service deadline. If possible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged. To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

TeleService Report Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of BMW products from your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec essary. TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical requirements and have a valid Assist contract; this feature is free of charge.

Neither personal data nor position data is trans mitted. Indicate when the last Teleservice Report was transmitted:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Options" Open. 4. "Last Teleservice Info"

Services status Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status" 3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService and BMW Assist. "Update BMW Assist"

Data transfer During the updating of BMW services, display the status of the data transfer.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Options" Open. 3. "Data transfer"

Seite 237

ConnectedDrive Communication

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Apps At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable cell phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Con trol Display. Operation can be performed via iDrive.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The cell phone operating system supports

the software applications of Apps. Software applications are installed on the

cell phone and ready to use. Corresponding mobile wireless contract.

Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps.

Use only BMW approved software applica tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc tions.

Information about suitable cell phones, available software applications and their installation can be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at the service center.

Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in danger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is station ary.

Use apps 1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in

adapter or via the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.

Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"

PlugIn Selected functions of the cell phone are dis played on the Control Display. Operation can be performed via iDrive.

1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. "PlugIn" 4. "Activate PlugIn" 5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the

controller and select, for example, a desired category or track.

Press button to switch within the cell phone functions to a higher level or back.

Press button twice to switch back to the main menu.

Notes The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on

the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the cell phone.

The data transmission of the software ap plications from the cell phone to the vehicle can last some time. Some software applica tions depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the cell phone.

Some cell phones cannot simultaneously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys tem. If necessary, restart the software application on the cell phone after a phone conversa tion.

Seite 238

Communication ConnectedDrive

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 239

ConnectedDrive Communication

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Mobility To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this

chapter supplies you with important information on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and

tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside Assistance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Refueling Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Refuel promptly Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage may occur.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex ample.

Seite 242

Mobility Refueling

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

1. Open the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas

station.

Seite 243

Refueling Mobility

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel quality Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic con verter and other components.

Do not refuel with ethanol Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply sys tem.

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 or AKI 89 BMW recommends AKI 91 or 89.

Gasoline with lower AKI The minimum AKI Rating is 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini

mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine damage may occur.

Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant differ ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

driveability, starting and stalling problems es pecially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high al titude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in unscheduled maintenance.

Seite 244

Mobility Fuel

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort.

Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure: Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 246, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum allowable driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 246, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Seite 245

Wheels and tires Mobility

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

640i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.2 / 32

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

650i

Tire size Pressure specifica tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.2 / 32

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

650i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in psi/ kilopascal with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

Seite 246

Mobility Wheels and tires

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex

cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

640i Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.2 / 32

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.9 /42

Seite 247

Wheels and tires Mobility

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.3 / 33 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 -

- 2.9 /42

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 18 104 M

Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

650i Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.9 /42

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.3 / 33 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39 -

- 2.9 /42

650i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature

Seite 248

Mobility Wheels and tires

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC

2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.2 / 32 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.4 / 35

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/ PSI with cold tires

245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M +S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44

245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC

2.9 /42 3.1 / 45

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

V: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC H: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35 -

- 2.6 / 38

V: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC H: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

2.6 / 38 -

- 2.6 / 38

V: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC H: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

- 2.8 / 41

Tire identification marks Tire size 255/50 R 19 103 Y 255: nominal width in mm 50: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 19: rim diameter in inches 103: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 3510: tire age

Seite 249

Wheels and tires Mobility

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age DOT 3510: the tire was manufactured in the 35th week in 2010.

Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli mate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro planing, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and pos sible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 253, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Seite 250

Mobility Wheels and tires

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning

between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro file tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong tendency

to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici pants.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Seite 251

Wheels and tires Mobility

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Wheel and tire combination Information on the correct wheel-tire combina tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob tained from your service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe riod. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/ 300 km.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe cialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the

winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci dents can occur.

Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Seite 252

Mobility Wheels and tires

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 94.

Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recommended. Consult your service center for more informa tion.

Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 225/55 R 17. 245/45 R 18. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Snow chain detection

The concept When using snow chains, you should set whether you are driving with or without snow chains via the iDrive. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display.

Seite 253

Wheels and tires Mobility

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer ing of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated automatically. At speeds above the maximum allowable speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again automatically.

Activating the status 1. "Settings" 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detection If functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated . After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation.

Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated . At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually.

If not functioning properly: Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not

activated . A Check Control message is not displayed. The automatic detection system is malfunc tioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti vated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.

Seite 254

Mobility Wheels and tires

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number 2 Jump-starting, negative terminal 3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Oil filler neck. 6 Coolant reservoir

Hood Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Seite 255

Engine compartment Mobility

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Never reach into the engine compartment Never reach into the intermediate spaces

or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot parts.

1. Pull the lever.

2. Press the release handle and open the hood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protruding

parts when the hood is open.

Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over imme diately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 256

Mobility Engine compartment

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Engine oil Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

Check oil level The concept The oil level is monitored electronically and dis played on the Control Display.

Requirements The engine must be running and warm after

the vehicle has been driven for at least 6 miles/10 km.

The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway.

Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages "Engine oil level OK" "Measurement not possible at this time." "Measuring engine oil level..."

Duration with the engine running: ap prox. 3 minutes. Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.

"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked." Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi

ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en gine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Note the newly calculated remaining mile age until the next oil service. Have the sys tem checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil Filler neck

When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Seite 257

Engine oil Mobility

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling Notes

No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine damage.

Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine dam age may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Some types of oils in some cases are not avail able in all countries.

Approved oil types

Specification

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added:

Specification

API SM or superior grade specification

Oil change An oil change should be carried out by your service center only.

Coolant General information

Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, en

gine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suit able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.

Seite 258

Mobility Engine oil

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Coolant level

Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess pres sure to dissipate, and then open it.

3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 259

Engine oil Mobility

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Maintenance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance System The maintenance system directs you to re quired maintenance measures and thereby sup ports you in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 74, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is con tinuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your ve hicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti vated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en tries are proof of regular maintenance.

Seite 260

Mobility Maintenance

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos sible. Canadian model: warning light indi cates the engine symbol.

The warning lamp flashes under certain cir cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfir ing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri ous engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control compo nents, in particular the catalytic converter.

Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel

vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.

Data memory Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op eration, faults and user settings. These data are stored in the remote control and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the ve hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way provide valuable information for service proc esses and repair or for optimizing and develop ing vehicle functions further. In addition, if you signed a service contract for Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv ices.

Seite 261

Maintenance Mobility

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Replacing components Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement General information

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the wind shield.

Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to

page 65, the wiper arms. 2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

Lamp and bulb replacement General information Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Seite 262

Mobility Replacing components

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, you

should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display el ements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare

into the unfiltered light for several hours; other wise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden sation evaporates after a short time. The head lamp glasses do not need to be changed. If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the like lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.

LED headlamps, Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) or light modules With Xenon-headlamps, the following lamps are designed with LED technology or as a light mod ule: Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps Turn signal lamps Front fog lamps Daytime running lights

Seite 263

Replacing components Mobility

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

With LED headlamps, all front lamps are de signed with LED technology or as a light module. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Follow the General instructions on lamps and bulbs., refer to page 262

Turning lamp on the Xenon headlamp Follow the General instructions on lamps and bulbs., refer to page 262 The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment. 55-watt bulb, H3

1. Turn the cap and remove it.

2. Detach the wire bracket.

3. Disconnect the cable at the plug-in connec tion and remove the bulb.

4. Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb has the correct orientation. Because of its shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one direction.

5. Secure the bulb with the wire bracket. 6. Connect the bulb. 7. Mount the cap.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal/brake lamp 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Tail lamp 5 Outside brake lamp 6 Rear reflector

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and license plate lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 262. These lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Lamps in the trunk lid

Access to the lamps

If necessary, remove the fasteners using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit and fold away the cover.

Seite 264

Mobility Replacing components

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Inside brake lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 262. 24-watt bulb, HP24W

1. Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.

2. Pull off the connector. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the

trunk lid in reverse order.

Reversing lamp Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 262. 16-watt bulb, W16W

1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

2. Pull out the bulb and replace it. 3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the

trunk lid in reverse order.

Changing wheels Notes The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire. When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only. Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center

Seite 265

Replacing components Mobility

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control messages are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the terminals, refer to page 269, in the engine com partment with the engine off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again. Time: update. Date: update. Radio station: save again. Navigation system: wait for the operability of

the navigation.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Notes

Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

Seite 266

Mobility Replacing components

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Emergency Request Requirements Equipment version with full preparation

package mobile phone. An Emergency Request can be made, even if no mobile phones are paired with the ve hicle.

BMW Assist is activated. The radio ready state is switched on. The BMW Assist system is logged in to a

wireless communications network sup ported by BMW Assist.

The Assist system is functional. Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Re

quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Service contract After your contract with BMW Assist has ex

pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac tivated by the service center without you having to visit a workshop. After deactivation, an Emergency Request is no longer possible.

Under certain circumstances, the system can be reactivated by a service center after you sign a new contract.

Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

button lights up. The LED lights up: an Emergency Request

was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished.

The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been es tablished. After the Emergency Request arrives at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW

Seite 267

Breakdown assistance Mobility

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstan ces. For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid. To remove, loosen the bracket.

First aid kit The first aid kit is located in the insert in the rear seat backrest.

1. Pull the release in the direction of the arrow, and remove the insert from the front. If nec essary, when pulling the release, press against the insert.

2. Remove the first aid kit.

When replacing the insert, place both pins into the rail at the bottom and press the insert back in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.

Seite 268

Mobility Breakdown assistance

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 234 phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be es tablished directly.

Jump starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo nents while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa tion can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other wise, there is the danger of short circuits.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive ter minal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal.

Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter

minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing assis tance.

5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre sponding engine or body ground of the ve hicle to be started.

Seite 269

Breakdown assistance Mobility

269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged bat tery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicle The parking brake is blocked The parking brake cannot be released

manually. When the parking brake is blocked, do not tow with the front axle lifted or the vehicle can be damaged. Contact your service center.

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un available.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steer ing.

Larger steering wheel movements are re quired.

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Automatic transmission: transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a loading

platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.

Seite 270

Mobility Breakdown assistance

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the

vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

Maneuvering capability is limited during cor nering.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se cured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor cover.

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads

only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve hicle can occur.

Seite 271

Breakdown assistance Mobility

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Screw thread

Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Tow-starting

Automatic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Manual transmission If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 269. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con verter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 57, on. 3. Engage third gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch

pressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warn ing system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 272

Mobility Breakdown assistance

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Care Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Car washes Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 / 60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/ 30 cm.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve hicle.

Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Notes Note the following: Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 65, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.

In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 41.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: Manual transmission:

1. Release the parking brake, refer to page 61. 2. Drive into the car wash. 3. Shift to neutral. 4. Switch the engine off. 5. Switch on the ignition.

Seite 273

Care Mobility

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Automatic transmission:

1. Release the parking brake, refer to page 61, and deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 62.

2. Drive into the car wash. 3. Depress the brake pedal as needed. 4. Engage transmission position N. 5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the igni

tion remains switched on, and a Check-Con trol message is displayed.

Transmission position P with the igni tion off

When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an auto matic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Transmission position Transmission position P is engaged automati cally: When the ignition is switched off. After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to

insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan gerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences can act on the vehicle paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Seite 274

Mobility Care

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma terial vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets above 140 /60 ; follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particu larly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans ers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil icon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include:

Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Floor carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Seite 275

Care Mobility

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with a microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleans

ers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 276

Mobility Care

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seite 277

Care Mobility

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Reference This chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the information

you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Technical data Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions Width, height

1 Vehicle height: 53.9 inches / 1,369 mm 2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 in

ches / 1,894 mm

3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 in ches / 2,081 mm

Seite 280

Reference Technical data

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Length, wheel base

1 Wheel base: 112.4 inches / 2,855 mm 2 Length: 192.8 inches / 4,896 mm

Smallest turning circle Dia.: 38.4 ft/11.7 m xDrive Dia.: 38.7 ft/11.8 m

Weights

640i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,828/2,190

Load lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,425/1,100

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,668/1,210

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460

Seite 281

Technical data Reference

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

650i

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission Sport automatic transmission

lbs/kg lbs/kg

5,115/2,320 5,115/2,320

Load lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,568/1,165

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,734/1,240

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460

650i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,203/2,360

Load lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,690/1,220

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,756/1,250

Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to page 244

Windshield and headlamp washer system

US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0

Seite 282

Reference Technical data

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Short commands of the voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equip ment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 22.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands The following short commands are valid for ve hicles with voice activation system. They do not work in equipment packages with which only the mobile phone can be operated by voice activa tion.

Adjusting Vehicle

Function Command

Open the main menu. Main menu

Open the options. Options

Open the settings. Settings

Info display of the instrument cluster. Info Display

Settings on the Control Display. Control display

Open the time and date. Time and date

Open the language and units. Language and units

Open the speed limit. Speed

Open the light. Lighting

Open the door lock. Door locks

Open the profiles. Profiles

Seite 283

Short commands of the voice activation system Reference

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Function Command

Open the Driving Mode menu. Driving mode

Open the ECO PRO menu. ECO PRO mode

Equipment

Function Command

Open the air conditioning settings. Climate

Open the Head-up Display. head up display

Vehicle information Owner's Manual

Function Command

Open the Owner's Manual. Display Owner's Manual

Open the Quick Reference Guide. Quick reference

Open the index. Owner's Manual

Open the search by pictures. Search by pictures

Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. Onboard info

Open the trip computer. Trip computer

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info

Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status

Call up ECO PRO tips. ECO PRO Tips

Seite 284

Reference Short commands of the voice activation system

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Function Command

Open EfficientDynamics menu. Efficient Dynamics

EfficientDynamics split screen. Split screen Efficient Dynamics

Navigation General information

Function Command

Opens the Navigation menu. Navigation

Open the destination entry. Enter address

Enter the address. Enter address

Enter a town/city. City

Enter a state/province. State

Enter the postal code. Postal Code

Open destination guidance. Guidance

Start destination guidance. Start guidance

Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance

Open the home address. Home address

Open the route criteria. Route preference

Open the route. Route information

Turn on spoken instructions. Switch on voice instructions

Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions

Turn off spoken instructions. Switch off voice instructions

Display the address book. Address book

Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations

Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info

Special destinations. Points of interest

Seite 285

Short commands of the voice activation system Reference

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Map

Function Command

Display the map. Map

Map facing north. Map facing north

Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel

Perspective map. Map perspective view

Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling

Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet

Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters

Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilo meters

Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen. Switch on splitscreen

Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen

Adjust the split screen. Split screen content

Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north

Split screen, current position. Split screen current position

Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of travel

Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view

Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers

Seite 286

Reference Short commands of the voice activation system

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Function Command

Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions

Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info

Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer

Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. Enter address

Trip list. Stored trips

Radio FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. Radio

Open the FM stations. F M

Open the manual search. Manual

Select a frequency range. Select frequency

Open a station. Select station

Seite 287

Short commands of the voice activation system Reference

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., frequency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. A M

Open the manual search. Manual

Weather Band

Function Command

Open the Weather Band. Weather band

Switch on the Weather Band. Weather band on

Select a Weather Band station. Select a weather channel

Satellite radio

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio

Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on

Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. Presets

Choose a stored station. Select preset

Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2

Seite 288

Reference Short commands of the voice activation system

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

CD/Multimedia CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e.g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. C D on

Select a CD. Select C D

Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menus. C D and multimedia

CD and DVD. C D

Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g. DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen.

Entertainment details

Music collection

Function Command

Search for music, open a menu. Music search

Open the current playback. Current playback

Open the music collection. Music collection

Play back the music collection. Music collection on

Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. External devices

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

AUX at front. AUX front

Seite 289

Short commands of the voice activation system Reference

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. Tone

Telephone

Function Command

Dial a phone number. Dial number

Opens the Telephone menu. Telephone

Display the phone book. Phonebook

Redialing. Redial

Display received calls. Received calls

List of messages. Messages

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Office

Function Command

Open the Office menu. Office

Display Office Today. Current office

Display the contacts. Contacts

Display the messages. Messages

Display the calendar. Calendar

Display the tasks. Tasks

Display the reminders. Reminders

Seite 290

Reference Short commands of the voice activation system

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Contacts

Function Command

Select a name. Choose name

My contacts. My contacts

Open the contacts. Contacts

New contact. New contact

BMW Assist or ConnectedDrive

Function Command

Open BMW Assist. Open ConnectedDrive.

B M W Assist Connected Drive

Open BMW Search. B M W Online

Seite 291

Short commands of the voice activation system Reference

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 98 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 106 Activated-charcoal filter 134 Active Blind Spot Detec

tion 96 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 106 Active seat, front 47 Active seat ventilation,

front 47 Active Steering, integral 101 Adaptive brake assistant 98 Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 97 Adaptive drive 101 Adaptive light control 83 Additional telephone 210 Additives, oil 258 Adjustments, seats/head re

straints 45 Airbags 86 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 87 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated-air mode 133 Air distribution, manual 132 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 133 Air pressure, tires 245 Air vents, refer to Ventila

tion 134 Air volume, automatic climate

control 132 Alarm system 40 Alarm, unintentional 41 All around the center con

sole 14

All around the headliner 15 All around the steering

wheel 12 ALL program, automatic cli

mate control 133 All-season tires, refer to Win

ter tires 252 All-wheel-drive 100 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 137 Alternative oil types 258 AM/FM station 179 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc tions 168

Antifreeze, washer fluid 66 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 98 Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 98 Applications 238 Appointments 228 Approved engine oils 258 Apps 238 Apps, video playback 202 Armrest, refer to Center arm

rest 142 Arrival time 77 Ashtray 138 Assist 233 Assistance, Roadside Assis

tance 268 Assistance when driving

off 98 Audio playback 188 Audio playback, Blue

tooth 202 AUTO H button, refer to Auto

matic Hold 62 AUTO intensity 132 Automatic car wash 273

Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 106

Automatic Curb Monitor 52 Automatic deactivation, front

passenger airbags 88 Automatic Engine Start/Stop

Function 59 Automatic headlamp con

trol 82 Automatic Hold 62 Automatic locking 37 Automatic recirculated-air

control 133 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 37 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 AUTO program, automatic cli

mate control 132 AUTO program, intensity 132 AUX-IN port 199 Average fuel consumption 76 Average speed 76 Axle loads, weights 281

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 46 Backrest, seats 45 Backrest, width 46 Backup camera 118 Balance 176 Band-Aids, refer to First aid

kit 268 Bang & Olufsen 177 Bar for tow-starting/tow

ing 271 Bass 176 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 265

Seite 292

Reference Everything from A to Z

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 30

Battery, vehicle 265 Belts, safety belts 48 Beverage holder, cu

pholder 142 Blinds, sun protection 42 Bluetooth audio 202 BMW Assist 233 BMW homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW Maintenance Sys

tem 260 BMW Search 235 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 142 Brake assistant 98 Brake assistant, adaptive 98 Brake discs, breaking in 146 Brake force display 97 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 97 Brake lamps, bulb replace

ment 264 Brake lights, adaptive 97 Brake pads, breaking in 146 Braking, notes 147 Breakdown assis

tance 267, 268 Breaking in 146 Brightness of Control Dis

play 79 Bulb replacement 262 Bulb replacement, front 263 Bulb replacement, rear 264 Bulbs and lamps 262 Button, RES 108 Button, Start/Stop 57 Bypassing, refer to starting

aid 269

C Calendar 228 California Proposition 65

Warning 7

Camera, backup camera 120 Camera, care 276 Camera, Side View 123 Camera, Top View 122 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 142 Car battery 265 Car care products 274 Care, displays 276 Care, vehicle 274 Cargo 149 Cargo area lid 38 Cargo area, storage compart

ments 143 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 150 Car key, refer to Remote con

trol 30 Carpet, care 275 Car wash 273 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 147 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 260 CD/DVD 187 CDs, storing 194 Cell phone 210 Center armrest 142 Center console 14 Center speaker 177 Central locking system 33 Central screen, refer to Control

Display 16 Central speaker 177 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6 Changing parts 262 Changing wheels 265 Changing wheels/tires 251 Check Control 70 Checking the oil level 257 Children, seating position 54 Children, transporting

safely 54 Child restraint fixing sys

tem 54

Child restraint fixing system LATCH 55

Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 54

Child seat, mounting 54 Child seats 54 Chrome parts, care 275 Cigarette lighter 138 Cleaning, displays 276 Climate control 131 Climate control wind

shield 147 Clock 73 Closing/opening from in

side 37 Closing/opening via door

lock 36 Closing/opening with remote

control 34 Collision warning 112 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signals 63 Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 64 COMFORT+ program, Driving

Experience Switch 104 Comfort Access 39 COMFORT program, Driving

Experience Switch 104 Computer 76 Concierge service 234 Condensation on win

dows 132 Condensation under the vehi

cle 148 Condition Based Service

CBS 260 Confirmation signal 35 Contacts 223, 231 Control Display 16 Control Display, settings 78 Controller 16 Control systems, driving sta

bility 98 Convenient opening 34 Coolant 258

Seite 293

Everything from A to Z Reference

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Coolant temperature 73 Cooling function 133 Cooling, maximum 133 Cooling system 258 Corrosion on brake discs 148 Cruise control 113 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 106 Cruising range 73 Cupholder 142 Current fuel consumption 74 Current location, storing 160 Customer Relations 236

D Damage, tires 251 Damping control, dy

namic 101 Data, technical 280 Date 73 Daytime running lights 82 Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 132 Destination distance 76 Destination guidance 166 Destination guidance with in

termediate destinations 164 Destination input, naviga

tion 158 Digital clock 73 Digital radio 180 Dimensions 280 Dimmable exterior mirrors 52 Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 52 Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 63 Display, ECO PRO 152 Display in front wind

shield 129 Display lighting, refer to Instru

ment lighting 84 Displays 69 Displays, cleaning 276 Disposal, coolant 259

Disposal, vehicle battery 266 Distance control, refer to

PDC 115 Distance, selecting for

ACC 108 Distance to destination 76 Divided screen view, split

screen 20 Door lock, refer to Remote

control 30 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos

ing 37 Downhill control 100 Drive-off assistant 98 Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 98 Driving Experience

Switch 102 Driving instructions, breaking

in 146 Driving notes, general 146 Driving stability control sys

tems 98 Driving tips 146 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 98 DTC driving dynamics 99 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 99 DVD/CD 187 DVD/CD notes 193 DVD changer 191 DVD settings 190 DVDs, storing 194 DVD, video 189 Dynamic Damping Con

trol 101 Dynamic destination guid

ance 172 Dynamic Drive 101 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 98 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 99

E ECO PRO 152 EfficientDynamics 153 EfficientDynamics menu, refer

to ECO PRO 152 Electronic displays, instru

ment cluster 70 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 98 Emergency detection, remote

control 31 Emergency release, door

lock 37 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 242 Emergency Request 267 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 268 Emergency start function, en

gine start 31 Emergency unlocking, trunk

lid 39 Energy Control 74 Energy recovery 74 Engine, automatic start/stop

function 59 Engine, automatic switch-

off 59 Engine compartment 255 Engine compartment, working

in 255 Engine coolant 258 Engine oil 257 Engine oil, adding 257 Engine oil additives 258 Engine oil change 258 Engine oil filler neck 257 Engine oil temperature 72 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 258 Engine oil types, ap

proved 258 Engine start during malfunc

tion 31

Seite 294

Reference Everything from A to Z

294 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 58

Engine start, Starting aid 269 Engine stop 58 Engine temperature 72 Entering/exiting vehicle, assis

tance, steering wheel 53 Entering a car wash 273 Equalizer 176 Equipment, interior 136 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to DSC 98 Exchanging wheels/tires 251 Exhaust system 147 Exterior mirror, automatic dim

ming feature 52 Exterior mirrors 51 External devices 199 External start 269 External temperature dis

play 73 External temperature warn

ing 73 Eyes for securing cargo 150

F Fader 176 Failure message, refer to

Check Control 70 False alarm, refer to Uninten

tional alarm 41 Fan, refer to Air volume 132 Fault displays, refer to Check

Control 70 Filler neck for engine oil 257 Fine wood, care 275 First aid kit 268 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow

fitting 271 Flat tire, changing wheels 265 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 89 Flat tire, warning lamp 90, 93 Flooding 147

Floor carpet, care 275 Floor mats, care 275 FM/AM station 179 Fold-out position, windshield

wipers 65 Foot brake 147 Front airbags 86 Front fog lamps 84 Front lamps 263 Front passenger airbags, au

tomatic deactivation 88 Front passenger airbags, indi

cator lamp 88 Front seats 45 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92 Fuel cap 242 Fuel consumption, current 74 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump tion 76

Fuel filler flap 242 Fuel gauge 72 Fuel quality 244 Fuel, tank capacity 282 Fuse 266

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 136

Gas station recommenda tion 168

Gear change, automatic trans mission 67

Gear shift indicator 75 General driving notes 146 Glass sunroof, powered with

tilt function 43 Glove compartment 141 Gong, volume equaliza

tion 177 GPS navigation, refer to Navi

gation system 158 Gray display of the map 171

Gross vehicle weight, ap proved 281

Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 281

H Hand brake, refer to Parking

brake 61 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 137 Hazard warning flashers 267 HDC Hill Descent Control 100 HD Radio 180 Head airbags 86 Headlamp control, auto

matic 82 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 82 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture via remote control 35 Headlamp flasher 64 Headlamp glass 263 Headlamps 263 Headlamps, care 274 Headlamp washer system 64 Headliner 15 Head restraints 45 Head restraints, front 49 Head-up Display 129 Head-up Display, care 276 Heavy cargo, stowing 150 Height, seats 45 Height, vehicle 280 High-beam Assistant 83 High beams 64 High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 83 Hill Descent Control HDC 100 Hills 148 Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 98 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 142 Homepage 6 Hood 255

Seite 295

Everything from A to Z Reference

295 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Horn 12 Hotel function, trunk lid 38 Hot exhaust system 147 House number, entering for

navigation 159 Hydroplaning 147

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 73 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 73 Identification marks, tires 249 Identification number, refer to

Important in the engine com partment 255

iDrive 16 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 30 Ignition off 57 Ignition on 57 Indication of a flat tire 90, 93 Indicator and warning mes

sages 70 Indicator lamps 70 Individual air distribution 132 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 31 Inflation pressure, tires 245 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 92 Info display, refer to Com

puter 76 Information on the navigation

data 172 Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 102 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 93 Initializing, Tire Pressure Mon

itor TPM 90 Instrument cluster 69 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 70 Instrument lighting 84

Integral Active Steering 101 Integrated key 30 Integrated universal remote

control 136 Intensity, AUTO program 132 Interactive map 163 Interior equipment 136 Interior lamps 85 Interior lamps via remote con

trol 35 Interior motion sensor 41 Interior rearview mirror 52 Interior rearview mirror, auto

matic dimming feature 52 Intermediate destinations 165 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi

gation 159 Interval display, service re

quirements 74 iPod/iPhone 199

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 265 Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 265 Joystick, automatic transmis

sion 67

K Key/remote control 30 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 39 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 31 Kickdown, automatic trans

mission 67 Knee airbag 86

L Lamp replacement 262 Lamp replacement, front 263 Lamp replacement, rear 264

Lamps 81 Lamps and bulbs 262 Lane departure warning 94 Lane margin, warning 94 Language on Control Dis

play 79 Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 150 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 55 Leather, care 274 LED headlamps 263 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 263 Length, vehicle 281 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 21 License plate lamp, bulb re

placement 264 Light-alloy wheels, care 275 Light control 83 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 263 Lighting 81 Lighting, speaker 177 Lighting via remote control 35 Light switch 81 Load 149 Loading 149 Lock, door 36 Locking/unlocking from in

side 37 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 36 Locking/unlocking with re

mote control 34 Locking, automatic 37 Locking, central 33 Locking via trunk lid 38 Low beams 81 Low beams, automatic, refer to

High-beam Assistant 83 Lower back support 46 Lumbar support 46

Seite 296

Reference Everything from A to Z

296 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

M Maintenance 260 Maintenance require

ments 260 Maintenance, service require

ments 74 Maintenance system,

BMW 260 Malfunction displays, refer to

Check Control 70 Manual air distribution 132 Manual air volume 132 Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 61 Manual mode, transmis

sion 68 Manual operation, backup

camera 118 Manual operation, door

lock 37 Manual operation, exterior mir

rors 52 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 242 Manual operation, Park Dis

tance Control PDC 116 Manual operation, Side

View 122 Manual operation, Top

View 121 Manual transmission 66 Map, destination entry 163 Map in split screen 170 Map view 168 Marking on approved

tires 252 Marking, run-flat tires 253 Massage seat, front 47 Master key, refer to Remote

control 30 Maximum cooling 133 Maximum speed, winter

tires 252 Measure, units of 79 Medical kit 268

Memory for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 50

Menu, EfficientDynamics 153 Menu in instrument cluster 75 Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 17 Message list, traffic bulle

tins 170 Messages 225 Messages, refer to Check

Control 70 Microfilter 134 Minimum tread, tires 251 Mirror 51 Mirror memory 50 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 147 Mobile phone 210 Mode, ECO PRO 152 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 6 Moisture in headlamp 263 Monitor, refer to Control Dis

play 16 Mounting of child restraint fix

ing systems 54 MP3 player 199 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 12 Multimedia 187 Music collection 194 Music search 195 Music, storing 194

N Navigation 158 Navigation data 172 Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 49 New wheels and tires 251 Night Vision with pedestrian

detection 126 Notes 229

Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 271

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 261 Obstacle marking, backup

camera 119 Odometer 73 Office 222 Oil 257 Oil, adding 257 Oil additives 258 Oil change 258 Oil change interval, service re

quirements 74 Oil filler neck 257 Oil level check 257 Oil types, alternative 258 Oil types, approved 258 Old batteries, disposal 266 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 261 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 16 Onboard vehicle tool kit 262 Opening/closing from in

side 37 Opening/closing via door

lock 36 Opening/closing with remote

control 34 Operating concept, iDrive 16 Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Automatic

recirculated-air control 133 Overheating of engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 73

P Paint, vehicle 274 Panic mode 35 Parallel parking assistant 123

Seite 297

Everything from A to Z Reference

297 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Park Distance Control PDC 115

Parked-car ventilation 134 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 148 Parking aid, refer to PDC 115 Parking assistant 123 Parking brake 61 Parking lamps 81 Parking with Auto Hold 62 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 52 Pathway lines, backup cam

era 118 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 115 Pedestrian detection, refer to

Night Vision 126 People detection, refer to

Night Vision 126 Permissible axle load 281 Personal information 222 Personal Profile 31 Phone 210 Pinch protection system, glass

sunroof 43 Pinch protection system, win

dows 42 Plastic, care 275 PlugIn 238 Position, storing 160 Postal code, entering in navi

gation 159 Power failure 266 Power sunroof, glass 43 Power windows 41 Pressure, tire air pres

sure 245 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 92 Profile, refer to Personal Pro

file 31 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 20 Protective function, glass sun

roof 43

Protective function, win dows 42

Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 16

R Radiator fluid 258 Radio 179 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 30 Radio ready state 58 Rain sensor 65 Random 188 Random playback 188 RDS 180 Reading out loud 230 Rear axle steering 101 Rear lamps 264 Rearview mirror 51 Rear window defroster 133 Recirculated-air mode 133 Recommended tire

brands 252 Refueling 242 Remaining range 73 Reminders 229 Remote control/key 30 Remote control, malfunc

tion 36 Remote control, universal 136 Replacement fuse 266 Replacing parts 262 Replacing wheels/tires 251 Reporting safety defects 8 RES button 108 Reserve warning, refer to

Range 73 Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon

itor TPM 90 Residual heat, automatic cli

mate control 133 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 150 Retreaded tires 252

Reversing lamp, bulb replace ment 264

Roadside Assistance 234 Roadside parking lamps 82 Roller sunblinds 42 Roll stabilization, refer to

Adaptive Drive 101 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy

namic Drive 101 Rope for tow-starting/tow

ing 271 Route 167 Route criteria, route 166 Route, displaying 167 Routes, avoiding 166 Route section, bypassing 167 RSC Runflat System Compo

nent, refer to Run-flat tires 253

Rubber components, care 275

Run-flat tires 253

S Safe braking 147 Safety 6 Safety belt reminder 49 Safety belts 48 Safety belts, care 275 Safety systems, airbags 86 Satellite radio 181 Saving fuel 151 Scale, changing during navi

gation 169 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 16 Screwdriver 262 Screw thread for tow fit

ting 272 Search, refer to BMW

Search 235 Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 48 Seat heating, front 47

Seite 298

Reference Everything from A to Z

298 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Seating position for chil dren 54

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 50

Seats 45 Seat ventilation, front 47 Selection list in instrument

cluster 75 Selector lever, automatic

transmission 67 Sensors, care 276 Service and warranty 7 Service requirements, Condi

tion Based Service CBS 260 Service requirements, dis

play 74 Service, Roadside Assis

tance 268 Settings on Control Dis

play 78 Settings, storing for seat, mir

rors, steering wheel 50 Shifting, automatic transmis

sion 66 Shifting, manual transmis

sion 66 Shift paddles on steering

wheel 68 Short commands 283 Shoulder support 47 Side airbags 86 Side View 122 Signaling, horn 12 Signals when unlocking 35 Sitting safely 45 Size 280 Ski bag 139 Smallest turning circle 281 Smoker's package 138 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 220 Snow chains 253 Socket 138 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nostics 261

Software applications, iPhone 238

Software update 205 Spare fuse 266 Speaker lighting 177 Special destinations, naviga

tion 161 Specified engine oil

types 258 Speed, average 76 Speed limit, setting 77 Speed Volume, volume equal

ization 177 Split screen 20 Split screen map settings 170 Spoken instructions, naviga

tion 168 SPORT+ program, Dynamic

Driving Control 103 Sport automatic transmis

sion 68 SPORT program, Dynamic

Driving Control 103 Sport program, transmis

sion 68 Stability control systems 98 Start/stop, automatic func

tion 59 Start/Stop button 57 Start function during malfunc

tion 31 Starting aid 269 Starting the engine 58 State/province, selecting for

navigation 158 Stations, stored 185 Station, storing 179 Status display, tires 89 Status information, iDrive 19 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Integral Active

Steering 101 Steering wheel, adjusting 53 Steering wheel heating 53 Steering wheel memory 50

Steptronic, automatic trans mission 66

Stopping the engine 58 Storage compartments 141 Storage compartments, loca

tions 141 Storage, tires 253 Storing the vehicle 276 Street, entering for naviga

tion 159 Summer tires, tread 251 Supplementary text mes

sage 72 Surround View 118 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 135 Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 Symbols 6

T Tachometer 72 Tail and brake lamps 264 Tailgate 38 Tailgate via remote control 35 Tail lamps 264 Tail lamps, bulb replace

ment 264 Tasks 228 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 6 Technical data 280 TeleService 234 Temperature, automatic cli

mate control 132 Temperature display, external

temperature 73 Temperature, engine oil 72 Tempomat, refer to Active

Cruise Control 106 Terminal, starting aid 269 Text messages 225 Text message, supplemen

tary 72 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 40

Seite 299

Everything from A to Z Reference

299 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Theft protection, refer to Cen tral locking system 33

Thermal camera, refer to Night Vision 126

Thigh support 46 Tilt alarm sensor 41 Tilt glass roof 43 Tilt, seats 45 Time of arrival 77 Tire damage 251 Tire identification marks 249 Tire inflation pressure 245 Tire inflation pressure monitor,

refer to FTM 92 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 89 Tires, changing 251 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 245 Tires, run-flat tires 253 Tire tread 251 Toll roads, route 166 Tone 176 Tools 262 Top View 120 Total vehicle weight 281 Tow fitting 271 Towing 270 Town/city, navigation 159 Tow-starting 270 Tow truck 270 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 89 Traction control 99 TRACTION program, Dynamic

Driving Control 103 Traffic bulletins, naviga

tion 170 Transmission, automatic 66 Transmission, manual 66 Transporting children

safely 54 Tread, tires 251 Treble, tone 176 Trip computer 77

Triple turn signal activa tion 63

Trip odometer 73 Truck for tow-starting/tow

ing 270 Trunk lid 38 Trunk lid, emergency unlock

ing 39 Trunk lid, hotel function 38 Trunk lid via remote con

trol 35 Turning circle 281 Turning circle lines, backup

camera 119 Turn signals, front, bulb re

placement 263 Turn signals, operation 63 Turn signals, rear, bulb re

placement 264

U Unintentional alarm 41 Units of measure 79 Universal remote control 136 Unlock button, automatic

transmission 67 Unlocking/locking from in

side 37 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 36 Unlocking/locking with remote

control 34 Updates made after the edito

rial deadline 6 Updating software 205 Upholstery care 275 USB audio interface 199 USB interface 141

V Variable steering, Integral Ac

tive Steering 101 Vehicle battery 265 Vehicle battery, replacing 265

Vehicle, breaking in 146 Vehicle care 274 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification number in the engine compart ment 255

Vehicle jack 265 Vehicle paint 274 Vehicle storage 276 Vehicle wash 273 Ventilation 134 Ventilation, refer to Parked-car

ventilation 134 Version of the navigation

data 172 Video playback 189 Video playback, iPhone 202 Video playback, snap-in

adapter 202 Voice activation, mobile

phone 218 Voice activation, short com

mands 283 Voice activation system 22 Volume, setting 176

W Warning lamps 70 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 70 Warning triangle 268 Washer fluid 66 Washer fluid reservoir, ca

pacity 282 Washer nozzles, wind

shield 65 Washer system 64 Washing, vehicle 273 Water on roads 147 Weather Band 181 Weights 281 Welcome lamps 81 Wheel base, vehicle 281 Wheels, changing 251

Seite 300

Reference Everything from A to Z

300 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 245

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 89

Width, vehicle 280 Window defroster, rear 133 Windows, powered 41 Windshield, climate con

trol 147 Windshield washer fluid 66 Windshield washer noz

zles 65 Windshield washer system 64 Windshield wiper 64 Windshield wipers, fold-out

position 65 Winter storage, care 276 Winter tires, suitable tires 252 Winter tires, tread 251 Wiper blades, replacing 262 Wiper fluid 66 Wiper system 64 Wood, care 275 Word match concept, naviga

tion 21 Wrench 262

X xDrive 100 Xenon headlamps, bulb re

placement 263

Seite 301

Everything from A to Z Reference

301 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 607 971 - 09 11 490

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 6 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 6 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 6 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2012 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.